Home

Allied Telesis AT-9724TS User's Manual

1. AT 9724TS Figure 3 2 Switch connected to a port on a hub or switch using either a straight or crossover cable any normal cable is fine Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 17 AT 9724TS 53 AT 9724TS qu Figure 3 3 Switch connected to switch using fibre optic cabling 3 3 Connecting To Network Backbone or Server The 4 combo SFP ports and the 24 1000 ports are ideal for uplinking to a network backbone server or server farm The copper ports operate at a speed of 1000 100 or IOMbps in full or half duplex mode The fibre
2. RIP Interface Settings IIP Address 10 53 13 126 Mode Disabled RX Mode Disabled Interface Name Disabled Disabled Click the hyperlinked name of the interface you want to set up for RIP which will give access to the following menu Figure 6 97 RIP Interface Settings Edit window RIP Interface Settings Edit Interface Name System IP Address 0 10 53 13 126 m Mode RX Mode Authentic ation Password NET Interface Metric Show All RIP Interface Entnes Refer to the table below for a description of the available parameters for RIP interface settings The following RIP settings can be applied to each IP interface Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 102 Parameter Description Interface Name The name of the IP interface on which RIP is to be setup This interface must be previously configured on the Switch IP Address The IP address corresponding to the Interface Name showing in the field above TX Mode Disabled Toggle among Disabled v Only vl Compatible and v2 Only This entry specifies which version of the RIP protocol will be used to transmit RIP packets Disabled prevents the transmission of RIP packets RX Mode Disabled Toggle among Disabled v Only v2 Only and vl or vi This entry specifies which version of the RIP protocol will be used to interpret received RIP packets Disabled prevents the recepti
3. 157 WMB Cast RX 2 EUN tI EUN Se DPPDU UM ERI OUT UU SI UIDERI SU rias ote cuite eet 159 Klee NA RA REENEN 160 Iu CREE E rM EP MID IE PEDE 162 Re Ceiveds RX 2255 162 Trarismitted TAX ceteris Mada trae seem us eu EE pee aN are A Neg ANA 163 Size ces eds ete dr aed x ete ates dac qu Lund ducis Sr Sg dE gle fal ved 165 Stacking Information s mote be ed eae Alea wane e Sie AER e eSI ble Mag Wyte ated OR fetum Li els Dd d aah ham RE E E tI Das Ba C E ELA 166 Device EE 167 MAC Address de e rt d en RISO OE Me IAE JS Dar ta DER MER E Rete bet ER 168 Switch History Log c l 2e 8 rene ck iik ket ge ee p fedes pr AE AI E AIT RI QUE eri PE ue P EST 169 IGMP Snooping EH 9e dor hd e MARIUS MUR Sec NIRE WEA eS ITO END VAI ed am ME INA d Cam e ELA 170 IGMP Snooping Forwarding es etse eee EELER 170 Browse Router sc eeu soc EE ert NUS Qt suerte dor A Ar E t eer aya dU Nd D EE 171 Port Access Control o LLL
4. EE E e Ne A Seed E KEE E CRUDELE UMEN 171 Authenticator State bee UE mesi tede add Qu Cede bes Ea eaim hak oae ded ec bleu acie es LE 171 Authenticator Statistics mesne rira ar AE RAEE E EP eR PE ed ales ge b rise pelo EE 172 A uthenticator Session Statistics tM Ee WE EE UR SEQ NES 174 Autheriticator Diagnostics 225505 e Rb MP M LICHE Wien deed MOOR ERN Ad RD I Rer 175 RADIUS Authentication 5 o nime RATE UAI UN RA UU E RSS UAR EN IR bU du EECH 176 RADIUS A counting nane ns Remp en He niim eerte cepit cre ei LE IR bes rete Dele 177 IE We oes TM ERE PM 178 Browse IP Address io Get Se RR IARE DAMM EMEN REIR E dx E I LOU USA E Re NEE piis 178 Browse Ruting Tablet e mea betae sot tied e Seed BEE eb ea Gand di sae Lave edt A dee E miss ed edes a dk Dae Ee E AE ee Eee Se E 179 Browse ARP EE 179 Browse IP Multicast Forwarding Table 2 3 Ar ce peor tee ta er whe Slee T WE EE S A DEL UE TE tates E EA A e 179 Browse IGMP Group T ble sodes o ibe e esee gb och fea esd nbs Ad EE e A Ee 180 OSPEMonhitoring 2 4 ette SEG de date dte Raise E UNE PE E
5. Eu SIVE E M 125 VRRP Config ration LAVAL ee E E ME TUNER DEN ESCENAS SERE EN NE 125 VRRP Interface Settings coca torem UD due eio St Oe Sim RUD Np RAM bep S Oued ra Cesare lover qa fase duse ued 126 IP Multicast Routing Protocol 4 re pecsens aid re RES ROT a FDS here NE In e EMEN De GUESS erae uer E Eb 129 IGMP Interface Config ratlon otim a dT UAR ei EN Ee EE age ve x Raf e e E LIMES 129 DVMRP Interface Configuration e pl e ke Rr DPI wa ge led eevee EE 130 DVMRP Global Settings creas sone EATUR RU Ue ni De EE tae UN IRA DUM S Uu ben US eC T IR DIDA ROREM NETS 130 DVMRP Interface Settings 35 55 Rises MR ETENEE PEETER ae She Galen eR EEN 130 PIM DM Interface EE 132 PIM DM Configurations Ee S a TOI el eene utei c HL mM V pL uc e EI Ee D Allied Telesyn 9724 5 High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Security Management Reque Merkur s exu Ee PEE EA UD Ua er ias e Ure C e aA XR eR TER EE RR E NUR 133 Security RE Eed TIU TEMP DIE EET AER 133 User ACCOUNTS A MEM ER 1
6. Hub 04 EX 0 100 5 Hub 10Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps 100Mbps 100Mbps 100Mbps 100Mbps Figure 6 8 Example of Port Trunk Group Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 34 The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port Data transmitted to a specific host destination address will always be transmitted over the same port in a trunk group This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the same order they were sent oo Note ports within the trunk group become disconnected packets intended for the disconnected port will be load shared among the other uplinked ports of the link aggregation group Link aggregation allows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link This gives a bandwidth that is a multiple of a single link s bandwidth Link aggregation is most commonly used to link a bandwidth intensive network device or devices such as a server to the backbone of a network The Switch allows the creation of up to 32 link aggregation groups each group consisting of 2 to 8 links ports All of the ports in the group must be members of the same VLAN and their STP status static multicast traffic control traffic segmentation and 802 p default priority configurations must be identical Port locking port mirroring and 802 1 must not be enabled on the trunk group Further the aggregated links must all be of the same s
7. ct Ed VE THERE DRE ETT e Dus es 102 Setting Up RIP MuR C UD EEN 102 oc Mp 103 Genera OSPF Settings ix quete ep dr gun RO ENG EIE d Were whereas Savers PES aei 117 OSPF Area ID Settings s t ensi ue REA Seen A REEL EE DAT EAT d EE RAN gon EE 117 OSPF Interface Settings sayin p eo en En URINE UPON eu IR Uu EE ERIS RS 118 OSPF Virtual Interface Settings snc Ee uter re PERI ERI RE SEENEN ne nca rn gn ez ei eager ODE 120 OSPF Area Aggregation Settings 4 sra tte x Dore dec ee SE em A dre t RN epe SA a NS Sieh dh Nec nl SA cs ed Iq re ears lor 121 OSPE HostRoute Settings ee e Ee Bee a ex ix adc Se 121 DHCP BOOTP I Relayi d pP IM et eee Dd e tele Eie tas Pe A e iet EINE 122 DHCP BOOTP Relay Information zitiert Peine deat sop delere ri detta ERI Ye p ee eme or grape dyes S Pete 122 DHCP BootP Rel y Settings Saved ws De d UTE taker 123 REENEN EE 123 Configuring DNS Relay 22 94 2x05 ette SERIES UAM Foe Moe Me Sh E AE ES CEU e qa AA ER a Mae AN P GEN ea ga Semen esau 124 DNS Relay StaticiSettings eve emet uu EELER 124
8. address must be one of the I Apply P addresses to avoid disconnection Figure 7 1 Security IP Management window Use the Security IP Management window to permit remote stations to manage the Switch If you choose to define one or more designated management stations only the chosen stations as defined by IP address will be allowed management privilege through the web manager or Telnet session To define a management station IP setting type in the IP address and click the Apply button 7 2 User Accounts Use the User Accounts Management window to control user privileges To view existing User Accounts open the Security Management folder and click on the User Accounts link This will open the User Account Management page as shown below User Account Management User Name Figure Access Right 7 2 User Account Management Table To add a new user click on the Add button To modify or delete an existing user click on the Modify button for that user Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 133 New Password Confirm New Password Access Right Show All User Account Entries Figure 7 3 User Accounts Modify Table Add Add a new user by typing in a User Name and New Password and retype the same password in the Confirm New Password Choose the level of privilege Admin or User from the Access Right drop down menu User Account Modify Table User Name Old Passw
9. Configuration Table Figure 6 26 Instance ID Settings window CIST modify Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 46 The user may configure the following parameters to configure the CIST on the Switch Parameter Description MSTI ID The MSTI ID of the CIST is 0 and cannot be altered Type The type of configuration about to be processed This window is used to add or delete VIDs to the configured VID List 1 4094 MSTI or internal CIST All other parameters are permanently set and therefore unchangeable This field is used to specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number to 4094 Click Apply to implement changes made To configure the parameters for a previously set MSTI click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID number which will reveal the following screen for configuration Instance ID Settings MSTI ID VID List 1 4094 Show MST Configuration Table Figure 6 27 Instance ID Settings window modify The user may configure the following parameters for a MSTI on the Switch Parameter Description MSTI ID Displays the MSTI ID previously set by the user Type This field allows the user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings The user has 4 choices VID List 1 4094 Add VID Select this parameter to add VIDs to the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter
10. Pete S Pete aic ICH m PERET EE 66 Understanding e 66 Bandwidth Control co hg acetate EE 67 QoS Scheduling Mechanism v s eee oxi eo Rete tuts OO RR ae A AS dedu pde Ka eS OORT e e e eT TAGEN NDA Oe ee eMe d Eae 68 Output Sched ulin girs ERE eee EE 68 Configuring the Combination Queues deam nsa eene d n ess 69 802 Ip Default E EE 70 802 1 PUSSE Priority ez Ae Mes DR Med homage chad Soe lak DN AE Mas ciue Ad 70 Traffic Segmentation yi 26s sist eo cies M 71 System tl PEE e Qe Ue EIE Qu RSS o s near RON Sar gta ger eae E NU CLP SPIELE IRI E AEN 72 E EE EE 74 Resets EINEN RU AR UE ERN ate Ke edu mame saves 74 quie Zone and DST Een be RO Re OC HORROR be a EE PERN CELERE C CE GC P c e 75 Access Profile Table o sse ep EXER BEE EE EE EEN EEO GSS RN s a OUR Rs a RO e es 76 Configuring the Access Profile Table igri ere pp YEN eh ETE WR MIR ede udi ERI RE d A AE AE 76 Port Access Entity 8021 muses seno tente SEE E V
11. Prior to the adoption of 802 1 Q VLANs port based and MAC based VLANs were in common use These VLANs relied upon a Port VLAN ID PVID to forward packets A packet received on a given port would be assigned that port s PVID and then be forwarded to the port that corresponded to the packet s destination address found in the Switch s forwarding table If the PVID of the port that received the packet is different from the PVID of the port that is to transmit the packet the Switch will drop the packet Within the Switch different PVIDs mean different VLANs remember that two VLANs cannot communicate without an external router So VLAN identification based upon the PVIDs cannot create VLANs that extend outside a given switch or switch stack Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 10 ports are also assigned PVID for use within the Switch If no VLANs are defined on the Switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLANs are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVIDs within the Switch to VIDs on the network The Switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmi
12. 00000000 mask 0x00000000 mask DxQ000000C mask 0000000 Offset 32 47 mask 0x00000000 mask 0 00000000 mask 0x00000000 mask 0x00000000 63 09000000 0000 00000 Figure 6 72 Access Rule Display window Packet Content Mask 6 22 Port Access Entity 802 1x Understanding 802 1x Port based and MAC based Network Access Control The original intent behind the development of 802 was to leverage the characteristics of point to point connections associated with UTP based LANs AII single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it one of which is a Bridge Port The Bridge Port detects events that indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link or an active device becoming inactive These events can be used to control the authorization state of the Port and initiate the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized This is the Port Based Network Access Control Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Port Based Network Access Control AT 9724TS Switch m ema PX m D Controlled Port port blocked 802 1X Client 802 1X Client 802 1 Client 802 1X Client RADIUS Server Figure 6 73 Example of Typical Port Based Configuration Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated the Port then becomes Authorized and all subsequen
13. Remove VID Select this parameter to remove VIDs from the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter This field is used to specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch that the user wishes to add to this MSTI ID Supported VIDs the Switch range from ID number to 4094 This parameter can only be utilized if the Type chosen is Add or Remove Click Apply to implement changes made Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 47 MSTI Port Information This window displays the current MSTI configuration settings and can be used to update the port configuration for an MSTI ID If a loop occurs the MSTP function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first In instances where the priority value is identical the MSTP function will implement the lowest port number into the forwarding state and other interfaces will be blocked Rem ember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets To view the following window click Configuration gt Spanning Tree gt MST Port Information Unit Port Apply 1 Pont Apply MSTI Port Information Port 1 of Unit 1 Msti Designated Bridge Internal PathCost Prio Status 200000 128 Forwarding NonStp Figure 6 28 MSTP Port Information window To view the MSTI setti
14. Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 161 The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval Record Number Select the desired setting between Is and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Bytes Counts the number of bytes successfully sent from the port Packets Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port Unicast Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a unicast address Multicast Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Bytes and Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 9 4 Errors The Web Manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Four windows are offered Received RX Click the Received RX link in the Error folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of error pack
15. Forward Port View Settings of Urat 1 Port 1 Figure 6 55 Setup Forwarding Ports window This page allows you to determine which port on a given switch in a switch stack will be allowed to forward packets to other ports on that switch Configuring traffic segmentation on the AT 9724TS is accomplished in two parts First you specify a switch from a switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then a port from that switch using the Port pull down menu Then specify a second switch from the switch stack and then you select which ports or different ports on the same switch on that switch that you want to be able to receive packets from the switch and port you specified in the first part Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch s Traffic Segmentation table The Unit drop down menu at the top of the page allows you to select a switch from a switch stack using that switch s Unit ID The Port drop down menu allows you to select a port from that switch This is the port that will be transmitting packets The Unit drop down menu under the Setup Forwarding ports heading allows you to select a switch from a switch stack using that switch s Unit ID The Forward Port click boxes allow you to select which of the ports on the selected switch will be able to forward packets These are the ports that will be allowed to receive packets from the port specified above Clic
16. In command line square brackets indicate an optional entry For example copy filename means that optionally you can type copy followed by the name of the file Do not type the brackets Indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu item For example Open the File menu and choose Cancel Used for emphasis May also indicate system messages or prompts appearing on your screen For example You have mail Bold font is also used to represent filenames program names and commands For example use the copy command Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in the manual Indicates a window name or a field Also can indicate a variables or parameter that is replaced with an appropriate word or string For example type filename means that you should type the actual filename instead of the word shown in italic Indicates the menu structure Device gt Port gt Port Properties means the Port Properties menu option under the Port menu option that is located under the Device menu Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Where to Find Related Guides The Allied Telesyn web site at www alliedtelesyn com under the support section contains the most recent documentation for all of our products All web based documents relating to this product and other Allied Telesyn products can be downloaded from the web site Contacting Allied Telesyn Technical Support You can
17. RAM Buffer Filtering Address Table Packet Filtering Forwarding Rate MAC Address Learning Forwarding Table Age Time Store and forward 2 MB per device 16 K MAC address per device Full wire speed for all connections 148 810 pps per port for 100Mbps 1 488 100 pps per port for 1000Mbps Automatic update Max age 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 191 Appendix B Translated Electrical Safety and Emission Information Important This appendix contains multiple language translations for the safety statements in this guide Wichtig Dieser Anhang enthalt bersetzungen der in diesem Handbuch enthaltenen Sicherheitshinweise in mehreren Sprachen Vigtigt Dette till g indeholder overs ttelser i sprog af sikkerhedsadvarslerne i denne h ndbog Belangrijk Deze appendix bevat vertalingen in meerdere talen van de veiligheidsopmerkingen in deze gids Important Cette annexe contient la traduction en plusieurs langues des instructions de s curit figurant dans ce guide T rke T m liite sis lt t ss oppaassa esiintyv t turvaohjeet usealla kielell Importante questa appendice contiene traduzioni in pi lingue degli avvisi di sicurezza di questa guida Viktig Dette tillegget inneholder oversettelser til flere spr k av sikkerhetsinformasjonen i denne veiledningen Importante Este anexo cont m tradu es em v r
18. Speed Duplex Toggle the Speed Duplex field to either select the speed and duplex half duplex state of the port Auto denotes auto negotiation between 10 and 00Mbps devices in full or half duplex The Auto setting allows the port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the port is connected to can handle and then to use those settings The other options are Auto OM Half I OM Full 00 1 00M Full 1000 M and 1000M Full S There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto The Switch allows the user to configure two types of gigabit connections 000M Full M and 1000 S Gigabit connections are only supported in full duplex connections and take on certain characteristics that are different from the other choices listed The 1000 M master and 000M Full S slave parameters refer to connections running a 1000 cable for connection between the Switch port and other device capable of a gigabit connection The master setting 1000MIFull M will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex speed and physical layer type The master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers The timing control is set on a master physical layer by a local source The slave setting 1000M Full S uses loop ti
19. To display the current settings for an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the hyperlink for the entry under the Group Name To add a new entry to the Switch s SNMP Group Table click the Add button in the upper left hand corner of the SNMP Group Table page This will open the SNMP Group Table Configuration page as shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 152 SNMP Group Table Configuration Group Name iew Name Notify View Name Security Model Security Level Show All SNMP Group Table Entries Figure 8 7 SNMP Group Table Configuration window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Group Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP group of SNMP users Read View Name This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages Write View Name Specify a SNMP group name for users that are allowed SNMP write privileges to the Switch s SNMP agent Notify View Name Specify a SNMP group name for users that can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Security Model 5 Specifies that SNMP version will be used SNMPv2 Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMPv2 supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes Read View Name improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some
20. In order for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security function to work properly TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch called an Authentication Server Host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication the Switch contacts the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify and the server will respond with one of three messages The server verifies the username and password and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch The server doesn t respond to the verification query At this point the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups one for each of the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols These built in Authentication Server Groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch The users will set Authentication Server Hosts in a preferable order in the built in Authentication Server Groups and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch the Switch will ask the first Authentication Server Hosts for authentication If no authentication is made the second server host in the list will be queri
21. Interface Name An IP interface name that has been enabled for VRRP This entry must have been previously set in the IP Interfaces table Authentication type Displays the type of authentication used to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router Possible authentication types include No authentication No authentication has been selected to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router Simple Text Password A Simple password has been selected to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router for authentication IP Authentication Header An MD5 message digest algorithm has been selected to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router for authentication VRID Displays the virtual router ID set by the user This will uniquely identify the VRRP Interface on the network Display Click the View button to display the settings for this particular VRRP entry Delete Click the X to delete this VRRP entry Click the Add button to display the following window to configure a VRRP interface RRP Interface Settings Add fi Admin State Priority 1 254 foo Advertisment Interval 1 255 ll Preempt Mode Tue sl Critical IP Address ooo Checking Critical IP Disabled gt Auth Type None Apply Show All VRRP Interface Entrie Figure 6 128 VRRP Interface Settings Add window Or the user may click the hyperlinked Interface Name to view the same window The following p
22. es Este produto atende aos seguintes padr es A gt PERIGO DE CHOQUE CAUSADO POR RAIO PERIGO N O TRABALHE no equipamento ou nos CABOS durante per odos suscetiveis a QUEDAS DE RAIO CUIDADO CABO DEALIMENTAGAO UTILIZADO COMO UM DISPOSITIVO DE DESCONEXAO PARA DESELETRIFICAR EQUIPAMENTO desconecte o cabo de ALIMENTA O EL TRICO EQUIPAMENTOS DO TIPO CLASSE DEVE SER FEITA LIGA O DE FIO TERRA PARA ESTE EQUIPAMENTO plugue de alimen ta o deve ser conectado a uma tomada com adequada liga o de fio terra Tomadas sem adequa da liga o de fio terra podem transmitir voltagens perigosas a pe as met licas expostas EQUIPAMENTO DE LIGAC O a tomada el ctrica deve estar instalada perto do equipamento e ser de f cil acesso CUIDADO As aberturas de ventila o n o devem ser bloqueadas e devem ter acesso livre ao ar ambiente para arrefecimento adequado do aparelho TEMPERATURA DE FUNCIONAMENTO Este produto foi projetado para uma temperatura ambiente maxima de 40 graus cent grados TODOS OS PA SES Instale o produto de acordo com as normas nacionais e locais para instalac es el tricas Est ndares Este producto cumple con los siguientes est ndares gt PELIGRO DE RAYOS PELIGRO NO REALICE NINGUN TIPO DETRABAJO O CONEXION en los equipos o en LOS CABLES durante TORMENTAS ELECTRICAS ATENCION EL CABLE DE ALIMENTACION SE USA COMO UN DISPOSITIVO DE DESCONEXION PARA DESACTIVAR
23. 1 1 102 00 50 ba 97 d7 cO Dynamac System 10 1 1 103 00 50 97 47 9 Dynarrsc System 10 1 1 163 00 50 ba 70 e4 55 Dynatrac System 10 1 1 164 00 50 ba 70 e4 65 Dynamac System 10 1 1 166 00 50 ba 70 e4 58 Dynarrac System 10 1 1 167 00 50 ba 70 e4 45 Dynatrac Next Total Entries 730 Figure 9 31 Browse ARP Table window Browse IP Multicast Forwarding Table The Browse IP Multicast Forwarding Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder This window will show current IP multicasting information on the Switch search a specific entry enter an multicast group IP address into the Multicast Group field or a Source IP address and click Find Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 179 Multicast Group IP Multicast Forwarding Table Source IP Upstream Expire ast G 5 ask Tulticast Group remm ource Mask Neighbor Time Total Entries 0 Protocol Figure 9 32 Browse IP Multicast Forwarding Table Browse IGMP Group Table The Browse IGMP Group Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder This window will show current IGMP group entries on the Switch search a specific IGMP group entry enter an interface name into the Interface Name field or a Multicast Group address and click Find Interface Name Multicast Group 1000 Find IGMP Group Table Interface Name Multicast Group Last
24. 802 10 tagged VLANs are implemented on the Switch 802 1 Q VLANs require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 Q compliant VLANs allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 10 enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1 Q VLANs will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1 Q VLANs allows VLANs to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLANs to span multiple 802 Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally The IEEE 802 1Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to the VLAN the receiving port is a member of Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 54 The main characteristics of IEEE 802 10 are as follows Assigns packets to VLANs by filtering Assumes the presence of a single global spanning tree Uses an explicit tagging scheme with one level tagging 802 1 Q VLAN Pack
25. Access Rule Configuration window IP Configure the following Access Rule Configuration settings for IP Parameter Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Mode Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Access ID Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 1 50 Type Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Mask Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header Priority 0 7 This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 p default priority previously set in the Switch Replace Dscp 0 63 VLAN Name Source IP Destination IP Dscp 0 63 Protocol which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user Replace priority with Click the corresponding box if you want to re write the 802 1 default priority of a packet to the value entered i
26. Displays the name of the IP interface for which DVMRP is to be configured This must be a previously defined interface IP Address Displays the IP address corresponding to the IP Interface name entered above Neighbor Timeout Interval 1 65535 This field allows an entry between and 65 535 seconds and defines the time period for DVMRP will hold Neighbor Router reports before issuing poison route messages The default is 35 seconds Probe Interval 1 65535 This field allows an entry between and 65 535 seconds and defines the interval between probes The default is 10 Metric 1 31 This field allows an entry between and 3 and defines the route cost for the IP interface The DVMRP route cost is a relative number that represents the real cost of using this route in the construction of a multicast delivery tree It is similar to but not defined as the hop count in RIP The default cost is State This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled and enables or disables DVMRP for the IP interface The default is Disabled PIM DM Interface Configuration The Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode PIM DM protocol should be used in networks with a low delay low latency and high bandwidth as PIM DM is optimized to guarantee delivery of multicast packets not to reduce overhead The PIM DM multicast routing protocol is assumes that all downstream routers want to receive multicast messages and relies upon explicit pr
27. EL EQUIPO desconecte el cable de alimentaci n ELECTRICO EQUIPO DEL TIPO CLASE I ESTE EQUIPO TIENE QUE TENER CONEXION A TIERRA El cable tiene que conectarse a un enchufe a tierra debidamente instalado Un enchufe que no est correctamente instalado podr a ocasionar tensiones peligrosas en las partes met licas que est n expuestas Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 195 EQUIPO CONECTABLE el tomacorriente se debe instalar cerca del equipo en un lugar con acceso f cil ATENCION Las aberturas para ventilaci n no deber n bloquearse y deber n tener acceso libre al aire ambiental de la sala para su enfriamiento TEMPERATURA REQUERIDA PARA LA OPERACI N Este producto est disefiado para una temperatura ambiental m xima de 40 grados C gt PARA TODOS LOS PA SES Monte el producto de acuerdo con los C digos El ctricos locales y nacionales Standarder Denna produkt uppfyller foljande standarder FARA FOR BLIXTNEDSLAG FARA ARBETA pa utrustningen eller kablarna vid ASKVADER VARNING NATKABELN ANVANDS SOM STROMBRYTARE FOR ATT KOPPLA FRAN STROMMEN dra ur natkabeln ELEKTRISKT TYP KLASS 1 UTRUSTNING DENNA UTRUSTNING M STE VARA JORDAD Niatkabeln m ste vara ansluten till ett ordentligt jordat uttag Ett felaktigt uttag kan g ra att n rliggande metalldelar uts tts for hogspanning Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag nar den ansluts till ett
28. Ethernet Switch OSPF interface Settings Edit Interface Name System 10 53 13 126 Lk Up IKOADCAST IP Address Network Mediam Area ID Rower Prierity 0 Hello Interval 1 65535 p 5535 Dead Dnterval 1 6 State Mose Auth Type Auth Key ID Metrie 1 65535 DR State DOWN DR Address Backup DR Address transmat Delay Retransmit Time Figure 6 115 OSPF Interface Settings Edit window Configure each IP interface individually using the OSPF Interface Settings Edit menu Click the Apply button when you have entered the settings The new configuration appears listed in the OSPF Interface Settings table To return to the OSPF Interface Settings table click the Show All OSPF Interface Entries link OSPF interface settings are described below Some OSPF interface settings require previously configured OSPF settings Read the descriptions below for details Parameter Description Interface Name Area ID Router Priority 0 255 Hello Interval 1 65535 Dead Interval 1 65535 State Auth Type Auth Key ID Metric 1 65535 DR State DR Address Backup DR Address Transmit Delay Retransmit Time Displays the of an IP interface previously configured on the Switch Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID configured above Allows the entry of a number between 0 and 255 representing the OSPF priority of the selected area If a Router Priority of 0 is selected
29. Feature Maintenance Contains screens concerning configurations and information about Switch maintenance including TFTP Services CF Services Dual Image Information Switch History Ping Test Save Changes Reboot Services and Logout Single IP Management Contains screens concerning information on Single IP Management including SIM Settings Topology and Firmware Configuration downloads a Note sure to configure the user name and password the User Accounts menu before connecting the Switch to the greater network Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 27 Chapter 6 Configuring The Switch 6 Switch Information 6 2 IP Address 6 3 Box Information 6 4 Advanced Settings 6 5 Port Configuration 6 6 Port Description 6 7 Port Mirroring 6 8 Link Aggregation 6 9 LACP Port Setting 6 IOMAC Notification 6 11 6 12 Spanning Tree 6 13 Forward amp Filtering 6 14VLANs 6 15 Traffic Control 6 16 Port Security 6 17 Port Lock Entries 6 18 QoS 6 19 System Log Servers 6 20 SNTP Setting 6 21 Access Profile Table 6 22 Port Access Entity 6 23 Layer 3 IP Networking 6 1 Switch Information The subsections below describe how to change some of the basic settings for the Switch such as changing IP settings and assigning user names and passwords for management access privileges as well as how to save the changes and restart the Switch Click the Switch Information link in th
30. GET Route Type Preference RIP OSPF Intra STATIC LOCAL OSPF Inter OSPF OSPF ExtT2 New Route Preference Settings Route Type RIP 1 999 OSPF Intra 1 999 STATIC 1 999 OSPF Inter 1 999 OSPF ExtT1 1 999 OSPF ExtT2 1 999 Figure 6 92 Current and New Route Preference Settings window The following fields can be viewed or set Parameter Description RIP 1 999 Enter a value between and 999 to set the route preference for RIP The lower the value the higher the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets The default value is 100 OSPF Intra 1 999 Enter a value between and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF Intra The lower the value the higher the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets The default value is 80 STATIC 1 999 Enter a value between and 999 to set the route preference for Static The lower the value the higher the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets The default value is 60 OSPF Inter 1 999 Enter a value between and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF Inter The lower the value the higher the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets The default value is 90 OSPF ExtTI 1 999 Enter value between and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF ExtT The lower
31. Head of Line Prevention on the Switch The default is Enabled This field will enable or disable the Jumbo Frame function on the Switch The default is Disabled Enables or disables Syslog State default is Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made 6 3 Box Information The Box Information Configuration screen can be found in the Configuration folder under the heading Box Information This window is used to configure the Master switch of a switch stack Master switch is the switch that will be used to configure the software applications regarding the switch stack Box Information Current Box ID New Box ID Box Type Priority Apply Figure 6 4 Box Information Configuration window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 3l Parameter Description Current Box ID The current Box ID of the Master switch in the stack New Box ID The new box ID of the Master switch in the stack Box Type The user may choose the model name of the Master switch in a stack to be the main configuring switch of that stack Priority Displays the priority ID of the Switch The lower the number the higher the priority The box switch with the lowest priority number in the stack is the Master switch Information configured in this screen may be found in the Monitoring folder under Stack Information 6 4 Port Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes a
32. High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 89 Initializing Ports for MAC Based 802 1 To initialize ports for the MAC side of 802 1x the user must first enable 802 1x by MAC address in the Advanced Settings window Click Port Access Entity gt PAE System Control gt Initialize Port s to open the following window Initialize Figure 6 80 Initialize Ports window MAC based 802 1x To initialize ports first choose the switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu then the range of ports in the From and To field Then the user must specify the MAC address to be initialized by entering it into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box To begin the initialization click Apply a Note user must first globally enable 802 1 in the Advanced Settings window in the Configuration folder before initializing ports Information in the Initialize Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1 X Reauthenticate Port s for Port Based 802 1 This window allows you to reauthenticate a port or group of ports by choosing a port or group of ports by using the pull down menus From and To and clicking Apply The Reauthenticate Port Table displays the current status of the reauthenticated port s once you have clicked Apply Click Port Access Entity gt System Control gt Reauthenticate Port s to open the Reauthenticate Port s window BackendState PortStatus ForceAuth Succes
33. Interval field is used to set the time in seconds between transmitting IGMP queries Entries between and 65535 seconds are allowed Default 125 Max Response Time This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed before sending an IGMP response report The Max Response Time field allows an entry between and 25 seconds Default 10 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 40 Robustness Value Adjust this variable according to expected packet loss If packet loss on the VLAN is expected to be high the Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet loss This entry field allows an entry of to 255 Default 2 Last Member Query Interval X This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages including those sent in response to leave group messages Default Host Timeout This is the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed for a host to continue membership in a multicast group without the Switch receiving a host membership report Default 260 Router Timeout This is the maximum amount of time in seconds a route is kept in the forwarding table without receiving a membership report Default 260 Leave Timer This specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds between the Switch receiving a leave group message from a host and the Switch issuing a group membership query If no response to the membership query is receiv
34. Lee Chart Unit 1 Port Port 13 65 127 77761 128 255 256 511 1024 1518 Figure 9 14 Rx Size Analysis window table The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description stands for seconds The default value is one second Time Interval Record Number 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 1024 1518 Show Hide Clear View Table View Line Chart Select the desired setting between Is and 60s where s Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that
35. Login c tdi e ORIS MOOG E EE em eu EE AMA EU e KE Oe P ec ds 185 Multiple Image Services 2526253 rt eerte TP du Me Page e hib ni ee n Pap p qnin Ces led me mne eL UE 185 Firmware Information secs ere E EE 185 Config Firrriware Image i5 2LAS ASIDE E eet IRIURE Ee 186 Pine Testa anhe a Se Se e eb Ae Died ech eo qe uas beue d s ae ae Vo EE 187 Save Changes MMC EE 188 EE 188 Reboot BEE EE Mee dE See E dE dE cea ed EE EE ole Mg 189 eet ne e MURS SE NU LR RA UU Cee RR ES EAR bee oe Neem Ra DUM 189 Appendix A Technical Specifications o ood abes A Mae beris de edo Sese d dle reed E etae d e a pta etu EE 190 Appendix B Translated Electrical Safety and Emission Information 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24 2 24 4 192 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Preface Purpose of This Guide This guide is intended for network administrators who are responsible for installing and maintaining the AT 9724TS Gigabit Switch How This Guide is Organized This guide contains the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 Introduction describes
36. NEL EECHER 25 Web based User Interface assu esu eo eda a EE EE EME CA TA 26 Areas of the User Intertaces cerea ke Ke ex eX ee AEN Erde EE EA KR Ra e ER AQ RERO E PO no CREE TUI RR UE ER CET QE OI KC ORIG re ROS 26 Web Pases Me cM MC ME Lr C p EE EE E 27 Configuring The Switch es tee el OF ote EE RER E edd eit pubs inde tie m ted 28 Switch INFORMACION ge Ee Cb d eo Oe Oa Wie eR CE S LE 28 IP Address eoe vassal FRU EAE pU pe DE RN E Ee E qe ed RISE ETE RS E NE REN EET OE RUINS YN S RC KEVIN DR EUH ER CE 29 Setting the Switch s IP Address using the Console 2 2 2 2 2 2 30 Advanced Settings arios yo teet umm eS bte reto E Sassi OS a te RUP Deny deal eode Suis etat e tatem A isa EA Mr ce ENABLE Due 30 Box Informatio Ro N DA E SE Ka Core OP IHRE Ra eu RO Galen Re e ei p qur e 3l Port Configurations edd ath pede etta ue sO ee Mans AD xc e EA Mas rece e enn ce d Able en EE 32 Descriptions ei RILIEVO INIRE DRE MEER QUIM ENS E POE EUIS 33 Pore Mirroring tS US EE I RUEDA Dd pee oS t UM Pee Send Au UA da eats TUO de ROM ELA SE 34 Link Aggregation c
37. Password or Key used must likewise be identical Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 120 OSPF Area Aggregation Settings Area Aggregation allows all of the routing information that may be contained within an area to be aggregated into a summary LSDB advertisement of just the network address and subnet mask This allows for a reduction in the volume of LSDB advertisement traffic as well as a reduction in the memory overhead in the Switch used to maintain routing tables Click the OSPF Area Aggregation Settings link to view the current settings There are no aggregation settings configured by default so there will not be any listed the first accessing the menu To add a new OSPF Area Aggregation setting click the Add button A new menu pictured below appears To change an existing configuration click on the hyperlinked Area ID for the set you want to change The menu to modify an existing configuration is the same as the menu used to add a new one To eliminate an existing configuration click the X in the Delete column for the configuration being removed Add OSPF Area Aggregation Settings isement De Network Netw Area ID etwork Network Number AY ET Figure 6 118 OSPF Area Aggregation Settings window Use the menu below to change settings or add a new OSPF Area Aggregation setting OSPF Aggregation Configuration Add Area ID 0000 Network Number 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Summ
38. RIP is not limited to TCP IP Its address format can support up to 14 octets when using IP the remaining 10 octets must be zeros Other network protocol suites can be specified in the Family of Source Network field IP has a value of 2 This will determine how the address field is interpreted RIP specifies that the IP address 0 0 0 0 denotes a default route The distances measured in router hops are entered in the Distance to Source Network and Distance to Destination Network fields RIP I Route Interpretation RIP was designed to be used with classed address schemes and does not include an explicit subnet mask An extension to version does allow routers to exchange subnetted addresses but only if the subnet mask used by the network is the same as the subnet mask used by the address This means the RIP version cannot be used to propagate classless addresses Routers running RIP version must send different update messages for each IP interface to which it is connected Interfaces that use the same subnet mask as the router s network can contain subnetted routes other interfaces cannot The router will then advertise only a single route to the network RIP Version 2 Extensions RIP version 2 includes an explicit subnet mask entry so RIP version 2 can be used to propagate variable length subnet addresses or CIDR classless addresses RIP version 2 also adds an explicit next hop entry which speeds convergence and helps prevent the forma
39. Reporter IP IPQuener IP Expire Total Entries 0 Figure 9 33 Browse IGMP Group Table OSPF Monitoring This section offers windows regarding OSPF Open Shortest Path First information on the Switch including the OSPF LSDB Table OSPF Neighbor Table and the OSPF Virtual Neighbor Table To view these tables open the Monitoring folder and click OSPF Monitoring Browse OSPF LSDB Table This table can be found the OSPF Monitoring folder by clicking the Browse OSPF LSDB Table link The OSPF Link State Database Table displays the current link state database in use by the OSPF routing protocol on a per OSPF area basis Search Type me Advertise Router ID LSDE OSPF LSDB Table Area ID LSDE Type Adv Router ID Link State ID Cost Sequence Figure 9 34 Browse OSPF LSDB Table The user may search for a specific entry by entering the following information into the fields at the top of the screen To browse the OSPF LSDB Table you first must select which browse method you want to use in the Search Type field The choices are All Area ID Advertise Router ID LSDB Area ID amp Advertise Router ID Area ID amp LSDB and Advertise Router ID amp LSDB If Area ID is selected as the browse method you must enter the IP address in the Area ID field and then click Find If Adv Router ID is selected you must enter the IP address in the Advertisement Router ID field and then click Find If LSDB is selected y
40. S un lel D ta d ug e roc AR AE 45 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch MSTI Port Inforr tion e Cee ae Pe RI a RU EMI I De Clerk E x EP Yvan t Ae gg E 48 STP Instance Settings 02 Goose e eoe teo eeu PER haces bet a Oe Gt eR dde de ed diese Sd OE dete e tei 49 STP Port S CtiN dee P P HO U E HM 5I Forwarding Filtering ze e ae IW e ee dE EE uve onde de a a fu QE NNI a FUE EE OE A 52 Unicast Forwarding ed SN uth EWS Ad UE HEN E 52 Static Multicast Forwarding eut ebur E APTE RE RANE RE e Amet e SA TRIN ARA AA ANE AE ARRIO EA 53 KIELEN 54 Understanding 802 1p Priority eg ee ee EV dO PRU Sis Ry EE Dedit eui ele dois xe aR ca Ret NS 54 VLAN Descriptions creen dE ER EDO RUM DE Ee QE ERUENERI NN EE TUA EET QE ERI MEE ERR BEE dd d MR UR CEST 54 Notes About VLANs on dle AT 97IMTS ioo eee er ERE REL esa AUCH TRIN UA PRUE EORR REQUE AA AGATUR EA SAE BER he LAU Med C A ER 54 IEEE 802 IQ E TEEN 54 BOZO VLAN Tags EE 55 Port VLAN ID esr pnm Shak p TIS Sood ne ba me Weds na ea EI ad thea EQ Ways wore
41. Settings From To AdminCtrl Dir PortControl IxPeriod QuietPeriod Supp Timeout ServerTimeout ReAuthPeriod ReAuth Show Authentcators Setting Figure 6 76 802 1 X Authenticator Settings Modify Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Parameter This screen allows you to set the following features Description Unit From To Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified Enter the port or ports to be set AdmcCtriDir Sets the administrative controlled direction to either in or both If in is selected control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port you selected in the first field If both is selected control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the controlled port selected in the first field PortControl This allows you to control the port authorization state Select forceAuthorized to disable 802 X and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required This means the port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802 1 X based authentication of the client If forceUnauthorized is selected the port will remain in the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The Switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface If Auto is selected it will enable 802 1 X and cau
42. Show All SNMP User Table Figure 8 3 SNMP User Table Configuration window The following parameters can be set Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 150 Parameter Description User Name Group Name SNMP Version Auth Protocol Priv Protocol Encrypted Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP user This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages VI Specifies that SNMP version will be used V2 Specifies that SNMP version 2 will be used V3 Specifies that SNMP version 3 will be used MD5 Specifies that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password SHA Specifies that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password None Specifies that no authorization protocol is in use DES Specifies that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a passwo
43. This field shows the MSTI IDs currently set on the Switch This field will always have the CIST MSTI which may be configured but not deleted Clicking the hyperlinked name will open a new window for configuring parameters associated with that particular MSTI VID List This field displays the VLAN IDs associated with the specific MSTI To delete a previously set MSTI Instance ID click the corresponding X under the Delete heading in the Current MST Configuration Identification window Clicking the Add button will reveal the following window to configure Instance ID Settings MSTI ID Type VID List 1 4094 Show MST Configuration Table Figure 6 25 Instance ID Settings window Add The user may configure the following parameters to create a MSTI in the Switch Parameter Description MSTI ID Enter a number between and 15 to set a new MSTI on the Switch Type Create is selected to create a new MSTI No other choices are available for this field when creating a new MSTI VID List 1 4094 This field is used to specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number to 4094 Click Apply to implement changes made To configure the settings for the CIST click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID number in the Current MST Configuration Identification window which will reveal the following window to configure MSTIID VID List 1 4094 7 Apply
44. This will open the SNMP User Table Display page as shown below SNMP User Table Display User Name Group Name SNMP Version Auth Protocol Priv Protocol Show All SNMP User Table Entries Figure 8 2 SNMP User Table Display window The following parameters are displayed Parameter Description User Name An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP users Group Name This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages SNMP Version VI Indicates that SNMP version is in use V2 Indicates that SNMP version 2 is in use V3 Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use Auth Protocol None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use MD5 Indicates that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used SHA Indicates that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used Priv Protocol None Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use DES Indicates that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard To return to the SNMP User Table click the Show All SNMP User Table Entries link To add a new entry to the SNMP User Table Configuration click on the Add button on the SNMP User Table page This will open the SNMP User Table Configuration page as shown below SNMP User Table Configuration User Name Group Name ISNMP Version V encrypted Auth Protocol Password Priv Protocol Password
45. Utilization link Time interea fi 8 D Record Number 200 EhowHide Iv Utilization Figure 9 Port Utilization window To select a port to view these statistics for first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port The following fields can be set Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 15 and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Click Clear to refresh the graph Click Apply to set changes implemented 9 2 CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization displays the percentage of the CPU being used expressed as an integer percentage and calculated as a simple average by time interval view the CPU Utilization window open the Monitoring folder and click the CPU Utilization link Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 156 Unit Uni Time Irterval t Record Number Show hide Utieabon Figure 9 2 CPU Utilization graph Click Apply to implement the configured settings The window will automatically refresh with new updated statistics The information is described as follows Paramet
46. accepting the Link State Age field The length in bytes of the link state advertisement This includes the 20 byte link state advertisement header Router Links Advertisements Router links advertisements are type link state advertisements Each router in an area originates a routers links advertisement The advertisement describes the state and cost of the router s links to the area All of the router s links to the area must be described in a single router links advertisement The format of the Router Links Advertisement is shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Router Links Advertisements Octets M w Link State Age Options Link State Type Link State ID Advertising Router Link State Sequence Number Link State Checksum Link ID Length Link Data Type No of TOS TOS 0 Metric TOS Metric Link ID Link Data Figure 6 107 Routers Links Advertisements In router links advertisements the Link State ID field is set to the router s OSPF Router ID The T bit is set in the advertisement s Option field if and only if the router is able to calculate a separate set of routes for each IP Type of Service TOS Router links advertisements are flooded throughout a single area only Field Description V bit When set the router is an endpoint of an active virtual link that is using the described area as a Transit area V is fo
47. alliedtelesyn com At login enter anonymous as the user name and your e mail address as the password European amp Latin America Headquarters Allied Telesis International SA Via Motta 24 6830 Chiasso Switzerland Tel 41 91 6976900 Fax 41 91 6976911 Allied Telesis International Services Piazza Tirana n 24 4 B 20147 Milano Italy Tel 39 02 4141121 Fax 39 02 41411261 REGIONAL LOCATIONS Austria amp Eastern Europe Allied Telesyn Vertriebsgesellschaft m b H Lainzer Strasse 16 5 6 1130 Vienna Tel 43 1 876 24 41 Fax 43 1 876 25 72 Poland Allied Telesyn Vertriebsgesellschaft m b H Sp z o o Oddzial w Polsce ul Elektoralna 13 00 137 Warszawa Tel 48 22 620 82 96 Fax 48 22 654 48 56 Romania Allied Telesyn Vertriebsgesellschaft m b H str Thomas Masaryk 23 Sector 2 Bucharest 0209 Tel 40 21 211 1817 8245 Fax 40 21 210 5610 Russia Allied Telesyn International UI Korovij Vall Dom 7 Str Office 190 119049 Moscow Tel 7095 9358585 Fax 7095 9358586 Serbia amp Montenegro Allied Telesyn Vertriebsgesellschaft m b H Krunska 6 11000 Belgrade Tel amp Fax 381 11 3033 208 381 11 3033 209 381 11 3235 639 France Allied Telesyn International SAS 12 avenue de Scandinavie Parc Victoria Immeuble Le Toronto 91953 Courtaboeuf C dex Les Ulis Tel 33 60 92 15 25 Fax 33 69 28 37 49 Greece Allied Telesyn International S r l Kiriazi 1
48. below AS External Link Advertisements Octets 2 3 Link State ID EN Advertising Router Link State Sequence Number Link State Checksum Length 2 Metric Forwarding Address External Route Tag Figure 6 110 AS External Link Advertisements Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Field Description Network Mask The IP address mask for the advertised destination E bit The type of external metric If the E bit is set the metric specified is a Type 2 external metric This means the metric is considered larger than any link state path If the E bit is zero the specified metric is a Type external metric This means that is comparable directly to the link state metric Forwarding Address Data traffic for the advertised destination will be forwarded to this address If the Forwarding Address is set to 0 0 0 0 data traffic will be forwarded instead to the advertisement s originator TOS The Type of Service that the following cost is relevant to Metric The cost of this route The interpretation of this metric depends on the external type indication the E bit above External Route Tag A 32 bit field attached to each external route This is not used by the OSPF protocol itself General OSPF Settings The OSPF General Setting menu allows OSPF to be enabled or disabled on the Switch without changing the Switch s OSPF configuration From the Layer
49. between and 18724 seconds This interval also determines the time interval the router uses to automatically remove prune information from a branch of a multicast delivery tree and begin to flood multicast messages to all branches of that delivery tree These two actions are equivalent The default is 60 seconds This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu and is used to enable or disable PIM DM for the IP interface The default is Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made Click Show PIM DM Interface Entries to return to the PIM DM Interface Table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 132 Chapter 7 Security Management 7 Security IP 7 2 User Accounts 7 3 Access Authentication Control TACACS 7 4 Secure Sockets Layer SSL 7 5 Secure Shell SSH The following section will aid the user in configuring security functions for the Switch The Switch includes various functions for security including TACACS Security IPs SSL and SSH all discussed in detail in the following section 7 1 Security IP Go to the Security Management folder and click on the Security IP link the following screen will appear Security IP Management IP1 Access to Switch IP2 Access to Switch IP3 Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 IP4 Access to Switch 0 0 0 0 Note Create a list of IP address that can access the switch Your local host IP
50. by the Administrator A maximum of eight 8 Enable Method Lists can be implemented on the Switch one of which is a default Enable Method List This default Enable Method List cannot be deleted but can be configured The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like TACACS XTACACS Local Enable the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no verification is found the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the Local Enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an Admin privilege a Note To set the Local Enable Password see the next section entitled Local Enable Password To view the following table click Security Management gt Access Authentication Control gt Enable Method Lists KT OG Method List s Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 Name lefault loca enable Figure 7 15 Enable Method List Settings window To delete an Enable Method List defined by the user click the X under the Delete heading corresponding to t
51. contact Allied Telesyn technical support through the company s web site www alliedtelesyn com under the support section or by telephone or fax EUROPEAN SUPPORT NUMBERS Telephone support is available Monday through Friday between 0900 and 1730 local time excluding national holidays Austria Belgium Finland France Germany Ireland Italy Luxembourg The Netherlands Norway Sweden Switzerland and the United Kingdom Free phone 00 800 287 877 678 or 31 20 711 4333 europe_support alliedtelesyn com Spain Free phone 00 800 287 877 67 or 31 20 711 4333 europe_support alliedtelesyn com Finland Free phone 990 800 287 877 67 or 31 20 711 4333 europe_support alliedtelesyn com Croatia and Slovenia Support Telephone number 385 382 1341 Support Fax Number 385 382 1340 Support e mail Address ATlhelpdesk_Croatia alliedtelesyn com Czech Republic Support Telephone number 420 296 538 888 Support Fax Number 420 296 538 889 Support e mail Address Czech_support alliedtelesyn com Hungary Support Telephone number 36 382 6385 Support Fax number 36 382 6398 Support e mail Address Hungary_Helpdesk alliedtelesyn com Poland Support Telephone number 48 22 535 9670 Support Fax number 48 22 535 9671 Support e mail Address Polska pomoc QAlliedtelesyn com Serbia Montenegro Macedonia Bosnia and Herzegovina and Bulgaria Support Telephone number 381 11 32 35 639 Support Fax Number 381 11 3235 9
52. cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets The time interval between the transmission of configuration messages by the designated port to other devices on the bridged LAN thus stating that the Switch is still functioning The user may choose a time between and 10 seconds The default is 2 seconds This field is only operable when the Switch is enabled for MSTP Setting this parameter as yes will set the ports to send out BDPU packets to other bridges requesting information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP the port will be capable to migrate from 802 14 STP to 802 1 w RSTP If the Switch is configured for MSTP the port is capable of migrating from 802 14 STP to 802 15 MSTP RSTP and MSTP can coexist with standard STP however the benefits of RSTP and MSTP are not realized on a port where an 802 14 network connects to an BO Iw 802 15 enabled network Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being upgraded to 802 1 RSTP 802 15 MSTP on all or some portion of the segment Choosing the true parameter designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status Choosing the
53. end on each year Click Apply to implement changes made to the Time Zone and DST window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 75 6 21 Access Profile Table Configuring the Access Profile Table Access profiles allow you to establish criteria to determine whether or not the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet s header These criteria can be specified on a basis of VLAN MAC address or IP address Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below in two parts To display the currently configured Access Profiles on the Switch open the Configuration folder and click on the Access Profile Table link This will open the Access Profile Table page as shown below Access Rule Delete Modity 2 Ethernet Modify Packet Content Mask Modify Figure 6 60 Access Profile Table To add an entry to the Access Profile Table click the Add button This will open the Access Profile Configuration page as shown below There are three Access Profile Configuration pages one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration one for IP address based profile confi
54. for Ethernet open the Access Profile Table and click Modify for an Ethernet entry This will open the following screen Access Rule Table Profile ID Mode AccessID Display Delete Figure 6 67 Access Rule Table To remove a previously created rule select it and click the X button To add a new Access Rule click the Add button Access Rule Configuration Frefile DD 1 Mode Permit Deny Access ID Type Ethernet Priority 0 7 Replace with Replace Dscp with 0 63 VLAN Name Source MAC 10 00 00 00 00 00 Destination MAC 0 00 00 00 00 00 802 1 p 0 7 ho Ethernet Type 0000 Figure 6 68 Access Rule Configuration window Ethernet To set the Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Parameter Description Profile ID Mode Access ID Type Priority 0 7 VLAN Name Source MAC Source Destination MAC Destination 802 1p 0 7 Ethernet Type This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Type in a unique identifier number for this access This
55. from this server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or a retransmission Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 177 a Note configure 802 Ix features for the AT 9724TS go to the Configuration folder and select Port Access Entity Configuration and other information concerning 802 may be found in Section 6 of this manual under Port Access Entity 9 12 Layer 3 Feature This folder in the Monitoring section will display information concerning settings configured in Layer 3 IP Networking of the Configuration folder These settings and parameters have been previously described in Chapter 6 of this ma
56. instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value or specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value Select IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask The user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filer packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize fin finish src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to deny dest port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to deny Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source por
57. is 0 minutes This field specifies the baud rate for the serial port on the Switch This field s menu is set at 115200 and cannot be changed This field specifies the length of time a learned MAC Address will remain in the forwarding table without being accessed that is how long a learned MAC Address is allowed to remain idle The default age out time for the Switch is 300 seconds To change this type in a different value representing the MAC address age out time in seconds The MAC Address Aging Time can be set to any value between 10 and 1 000 000 seconds The default setting is 300 seconds To enable system wide IGMP Snooping capability select Enabled IGMP snooping is Disabled by default Enabling IGMP snooping allows you to specify use of a multicast router only see below To configure IGMP Snooping for individual VLANs use the IGMP Snooping page under the IGMP Snooping folder This field specifies that the Switch should only forward all multicast traffic to a multicast enabled router if enabled Otherwise the Switch will forward all multicast traffic to any IP router The default is Disabled Use this pull down menu to enable or disable GVRP on the Switch Telnet configuration is Enabled by default If you do not want to allow configuration of the system through Telnet choose Disabled The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between and 65535 The well known port for the Telnet protocol is 23 Web based managem
58. its topological database are out of date The Link State Request packet is used to request the pieces of the neighbor s database that are more up to date Multiple Link State Request packets may need to be used The sending of Link State Request packets is the last step in bringing up an adjacency A router that sends a Link State Request packet has in mind the precise instance of the database pieces it is requesting defined by LS sequence number LS checksum and LS age although these fields are not specified in the Link State Request packet itself The router may receive even more recent instances in response The format of the Link State Request packet is shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch OSPF Link State Request Packet Octets N 3 A Version No Packet Length Router ID Area ID Checksum Authentication Type Authentication Authentication Link State Type Link State ID Advertising Router Figure 6 103 Link State Request Packet Each advertisement requested is specified by its Link State Type Link State ID and Advertising Router This uniquely identifies the advertisement but not its instance Link State Request packets are understood to be requests for the most recent instance Link State Update Packet Link State Update packets are OSPF packet type 4 These packets implement the flooding of link state advertisements Each Link State Update pac
59. l6 All Internal External ExtTypel ExtType2 Inter E2 RIP 0to 16777214 Type 2 Static 0 to 16777214 Type 2 0 to 16777214 Type Type 2 Table 6 7 Route Redistribution Source table Entering the Type combination internal type type 2 is functionally equivalent to all Entering the combination type type 2 is functionally equivalent to external Entering the combination internal external is functionally equivalent to all Entering the metric 0 specifies transparency This window will redistribute routing information between the OSPF and RIP routing protocols to all routers on the network that are running OSPF or access the Route Redistribution Table Configuration window go to Configuration gt Layer 3 IP Networking gt Route Redistribution Settings Route Redistribution Settings Metric 0 16 Add Modity Route Redistribution Table Src Protocol Dest Protocol Type Metric Delete Figure 6 89 Route Redistribution Settings and Table window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 96 The following parameters may be set or viewed Parameter Dest Protocol Src Protocol Type Metric Description Allows for the selection of the protocol for the destination device Choose between RIP and OSPF Allows for the selection of the protocol for the source device Choose between RIP OSPF Static and Local Al
60. n Secondary False Enabled D Link DOWN Show Al IP Interface Entries Figure 6 86 IP Interface Configuration Add window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 94 IP Interface Configuration Edit Interface Name Address 105313126 Subnet Mask 26000 WLAN Name Secondary Im Link Status Show All IP Interface Entries Figure 6 87 IP Interface Configuration Edit window Choose a name for the interface to be added and enter it in the Interface Name field if you are editing an IP Interface the Interface Name will already be in the top field as seen in the window above Enter the interface s IP address and subnet mask in the corresponding fields Pull the State pull down menu to Enabled and click Apply to enter to make the IP interface effective To view entries in the IP Interface Table click the Show All IP Interface Entries hyperlink Use the Save Changes dialog box from the Maintenance folder to enter the changes into NV RAM The following fields can be set Parameter Description Interface Name This field displays the name for the IP interface The default IP interface is named System IP Address This field allows the entry of an IP address to be assigned to this IP interface Subnet Mask This field allows the entry of a subnet mask to be applied to this IP interface VLAN Name This field allows the entry of the VLAN Name for th
61. n tverk UTRUSTNING MED PLUGG Uttaget skall installeras i utrustningens n rhet och vara l tt tkomligt VARNING Luftventilerna f r ej blockeras och m ste ha fri tillg ng till omgivande rumsluft f r avsvalning DRIFTSTEMPERATUR Denna produkt r konstruerad f r rumstemperatur ej verstigande 40 grader Celsius PPPP P ALLA LANDER Installera produkten i enlighet med lokala och statliga best mmelser for elektrisk utrustning Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 196
62. not one of the fifteen defined protocols by properly configuring the userDefined protocol VLAN The supported protocols for the protocol VLAN function on this switch include IP IPX DEC DEC LAT SNAP NetBIOS AppleTalk XNS SNA IPv6 RARP and VINES The following is a list of type headers for each protocol listed for VLAN configuration Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 58 Protocol Type Header in Hexadecimal Form IP over Ethernet 0x0800 IPX 802 3 OxFFFF IPX 802 2 OxEOEO IPX SNAP 0x8137 IPX over Ethernet2 0x8 137 DecLAT 0x6000 DecOther 0x6009 SNA 802 2 0x0404 NetBios OxFOFO XNS 0x0600 VINES 0x0BAD IPv6 0x86DD AppleTalk 0x809B RARP 0x8035 Table 6 4 Protocol VLAN and the corresponding type header In configuring the user defined protocol the administrator must make sure that the pre defined user type header does not match any other type header A match may cause discrepancies within the local network and failure to define the VLAN to forward packets to Static VLAN Entry In the Configuration folder open the VLAN folder and click the Static VLAN Entry link to open the following window Current 802 1Q Static VLANs Entries VLAN ID VLAN name Advertisement Delete Enabled Disabled Figure 6 40 Current 802 1Q Static VLANs Entries window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 59 802 10 Static VLANs menu lists a
63. setting is 128 Click Apply to im plement changes made Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 48 STP Instance Settings The following window displays MSTIs currently set on the Switch view the following table click Configuration gt Spanning Tree gt STP Instance Settings STP Instance Table Instance Type CIST Enabied 32768 bndge pnonty 32768 sys ID ext 0 Modity Disabled Modify Instance Status Instance Priority Priority 3277 0 ondge pnonty 32768 sys ID ext 2 Figure 6 30 STP Instance Settings The following information is displayed Parameter Description Instance Type Displays the instance type s currently configured on the Switch Each instance type is classified by a MSTI ID CIST refers to the default MSTI configuration set on the Switch Instance Status Displays the current status of the corresponding MSTI ID Instance Priority Displays the priority of the corresponding MSTI ID The lowest priority will be the root bridge Priority Click the Modify button to change the priority of the MSTI This will open the Instance ID Settings window to configure The Type field in this window will be permanently set to Set Priority Only Enter the new priority in the Priority field and click Apply to implement the new priority setting Click Apply to implement changes made Clicking the hyperlinked name will allow the user to view the cu
64. solution of up to 288 gigabit ports zd Note four SFP combo ports on the Switch numbered 21 24 cannot be used simultaneously with the corresponding 1000 ports numbered 21 24 If both ports are in use at the same time ex port 21 of the SFP and port 21 of the 1000T the SFP ports will take priority over the combo ports and render the 1000 ports inoperable 1 3 Features IEEE 802 3z compliant IEEE 802 3x Flow Control full duplex compliant IEEE 802 3u compliant IEEE 802 3ab compliant IEEE 802 3ae compliant for optional XFP module IEEE 802 p Priority Queues IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol support 2 IEEE 802 Ix Port based and MAC based Access Control IEEE 802 1 Q VLAN IEEE 802 10 Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1 W Rapid Spanning Tree and IEEE 802 15 Multiple Spanning Tree support Stacking support in Ring topology Access Control List ACL support Multinetting support Protocol VLAN support Single IP Management support Access Authentication Control utilizing 5 XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols Dual Image Firmware Simple Network Time Protocol support MAC Notification support System and Port Utilization support System Log Support High performance switching engine performs forwarding and filtering at full wire speed up to 128Gbps Full and half duplex for all gigabit ports Full duplex allows the switch port to simultaneou
65. spr k Importante O Anexo B cont m advert ncias de seguran a traduzidas para instalar este equipamento Quando vir o s mbolo leia a advert ncia de seguran a traduzida no seu idioma no Anexo Importante El Ap ndice B contiene mensajes de seguridad traducidos para la instalaci n de este equipo Cuando vea el s mbolo vaya al Ap ndice A para ver el mensaje de seguridad traducido a su idioma Obs Bilaga B inneh ller versatta s kerhetsmeddelanden avseende installationen av denna utrustning N r du ser skall du ga till Bilaga A for att l sa det versatta s kerhetsmeddelandet p ditt spr k Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Table of Contents Electrical Safety and Emission Statement ENEE d ye ee e P ed EE ERE rpm ESA HERI REP ere Ses Prefates EELS ee EID ed EEN eer PEE DO EDEN ERR ERE E E EE 5 Purposetof This Guide gt EE 5 How This G ide s Organized ois is a aia gk s m OMA eR E Detienen e SUUS eee RA EA 5 Document Conventions c paces AER DU TELE ER Ka eo FOR Rn oe REE RE OF e RR elt eoe C cR eee er 6 here Find Related Guides cvs EE NEE Oe EEO LENE AE ENEE E ERE NOR y is ERA ERR UY RS ER NA NES ad dO EO ER
66. strict priority for emptying its class while the other classes will follow a weight fair scheduling QoS Output Scheduling Configuration Max Packets Class 4 Figure 6 51 QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window Combination queue example Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 69 802 1 Default Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802 1 priority to each port on the Switch In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click 802 1 Default Priority to view the screen shown below Port Default Priority assignment From Priority 0 7 Pont Port The Port Priority Table Unit 1 ort Prsarity I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 5 Figure 6 52 Port Default Priority Assignment and The Port Priority Table window This page allows you to assign a default 802 1 priority to any given port on the Switch The priority queues are numbered from 0 the lowest priority to 7 the highest priority To implement a new default priority choose the Switch of the Switch stack to be configured by using the Unit pull down menu choose a port range by using the From and To pull down menus and then insert a priority value from 0 7 in the Priority field Click Apply to implement your settings 802 1 p User Priority The AT 9724TS allows the assignment of classes of service to each of the 802 1 priorities In the Conf
67. the OSPF Host Route Settings link To add a new OSPF Route click the Add button Configure the setting in the menu that appears The Add and Modify menus for OSPF host route setting are nearly identical The difference being that if you are changing an existing configuration you will be unable to change the Host Address To change an existing configuration click on the hyperlinked Host Address in the list for the configuration you want to change and proceed to change the metric or area ID To eliminate an existing configuration click the X in the Delete column for the configuration being removed OSPF Host Route Setting Host Address Metric Area ID Delete Figure 6 120 OSPF Host Route Settings window Use the menu below to set up OSPF host routes OSPF Host Route Setting Add Host Address Show All OSPF Host Route Entnes Figure 6 121 OSPF Host Route Setting Add window Specify the host route settings and click the Apply button to add or change the settings The new settings will appear listed in the OSPF Host Route Settings list view the previous window click the Show All OSPF Host Route Entries link to return to the previous window The following fields are configured for OSPF host route Parameter Description Host Address The IP address of the OSPF host Metric A value between and 65535 that will be advertised for the route Area ID A 32 bit number in the form of an IP address xxx xxx
68. the Switch cannot be elected as the Designated Router for the network Allows the specification of the interval between the transmission of OSPF Hello packets in seconds Between and 65535 seconds be specified The Hello Interval Dead Interval Authorization Type and Authorization Key should be the same for all routers on the same network Allows the specification of the length of time between the receipt of Hello packets from a neighbor router before the selected area declares that router down An interval between and 65535 seconds can be specified The Dead Interval must be evenly divisible by the Hello Interval Allows the OSPF interface to be disabled for the selected area without changing the configuration for that area This field can be toggled between None Simple and MD5 using the space This allows a choice of authorization schemes for OSPF packets that may be exchanged over the OSPF routing domain None specifies no authorization Simple uses a simple password to determine if the packets are from an authorized OSPF router When Simple is selected the Auth Key field allows the entry of a 8 character password that must be the same as a password configured on a neighbor OSPF router MD5 uses a cryptographic key entered in the MD5 Key Table Configuration menu When MDS is selected the Auth Key ID field allows the specification of the Key ID as defined in the MD5 configuration above This must be the same MD5 Key as used by
69. the port for transmission the port will add 802 1Q tag using the PVID to write the VID in the tag When the packet arrives at its destination the receiving device will use the PVID to make VLAN forwarding decisions If a packet is received by the port and Ingress filtering is enabled the port will compare the VID of the incoming packet to its PVID If the two are unequal the port will drop the packet If the two are equal the port will receive the packet Click Apply to implement changes made 6 15 Traffic Control Use the Traffic Control menu to enable or disable storm control and adjust the threshold for multicast and broadcast storms as well as DLF Destination Look Up Failure Traffic control settings are applied to individual Switch modules To view the following window click Configuration gt Traffic Control Traffic Control Settings Broade DA em ee ul Can Threshold Apply p Sterm Stor MT Pont Port l Disatied Crsabled Disabled 128 Apply raffic Cor Un 1 trol Table Unit 1 ort lreadrast Storm Multicast Sterm DA Unknow Threshold now U ww sa es 9 Disabled Disabled Daeabled 128 10 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 11 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 12 Disabled Disabled Dizabled 128 13 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 14 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 15 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 15 Dysabied Dusbied Disab
70. the value the higher the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets The default value is 110 OSPF ExtT2 1 999 Enter a value between and 999 to set the route preference for OSPF ExtT2 The lower the value the higher the chance the specified protocol will be chosen as the best path for routing packets The default value is 115 Click Apply to implement changes made Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Static ARP Table The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a TCP IP protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses This table allows network managers to view define modify and delete ARP information for specific devices Static entries can be defined in the ARP Table When static entries are defined a permanent entry is entered and is used to translate IP address to MAC addresses To open the Static ARP Table open the Configuration folder and then open the Layer 3 IP Networking folder and click on the Static ARP Table link Clear Static ARP Table Interface Name IP Address MAC Address Delete Figure 6 93 Static ARP Settings window To add a new entry click the Add button revealing the following screen to configure Static ARP Add a New Entry IP Address 0 0 0 0 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Show Static ARP Entries Figure 6 94 Static ARP Table Add a New Entry
71. topology change detection of MSTP or RSTP The protocol also provides for a variable used for migration in the event that legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP or MSTP The Spanning Tree Protocol STP operates on two levels l On the switch level the settings are globally implemented 2 On the port level the settings are implemented on a per user defined group of ports basis STP Bridge Global Settings To open the following window open the Spanning Tree folder in the Configuration menu and click the STP Bridge Global Settings link Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 43 STP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled STP Version STP compatible zl Hello Time 1 10 Sec Max Age 6 40 Sec Forward Delay 4 30 Sec Hops 1 20 Tx Hold Count 1 10 Forwarding BPDU Enabled Figure 6 21 5 Bridge Global Settings STP compatible ISTP Bridge Global Settings Status 37 Version Hello Time 1 10 Sec Age 6 40 Sec Forward Delay 4 30 Sec Hops 1 20 TX Hold Count 1 10 Forwarding BPDU Figure 6 22 STP Bridge Global Settings RSTP default ISTP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled D STP Version MSTP D Max Age 6 40 Sec Forward Delay 4 30 Sec Max 1 20 TX Hold Count 1 10 Forwarding BPDU Enebled D Figure 6 23 STP Bridge Global Settings The following parameters can be set
72. were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Check whether or not to display 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 and 1024 1518 packets received 1024 1518 packets received Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Stacking Information To change a switch s default stacking configuration for example the order in the stack see Box Information in the Configuration folder The number of switches in the switch stack up to 12 total are displayed in the upper right hand corner of your web browser The icons are in the same order as their respective Unit numbers with the Unit switch corresponding to the icon in the upper left most corner of the icon group When the switches are properly interconnected through their optional Stacking Modules information about the resulting switch stack is displayed under the Stack Information link To view the stacking information click on the Stacking Information link from the Monitoring folder Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 166 Stacking information Priora Runtime HIW version version version 1 2415 eos 00 204 001 2 c UJSR NOT CFG no 3 USR NOT CFG no d U
73. window The following fields can be set Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the ARP entry MAC Address The MAC address of the ARP entry After entering the IP Address and MAC Address of the Static ARP entry click Apply to implement the new entry To completely clear the Static ARP Settings click the Clear button To delete an entry located in the Static ARP Settings window click the corresponding X under the Delete heading RIP The Routing Information Protocol is distance vector routing protocol There are two types of network devices running RIP active and passive Active devices advertise their routes to others through RIP messages while passive devices listen to these messages Both active and passive routers update their routing tables based upon RIP messages that active routers exchange Only routers can run RIP in the active mode Every 30 seconds a router running RIP broadcasts a routing update containing a set of pairs of network addresses and a distance represented by the number of hops or routers between the advertising router and the remote network So the vector is the network address and the distance is measured by the number of routers between the local router and the remote network RIP measures distance by an integer count of the number of hops from one network to another router is one hop from a directly connected network two hops from a network that can be reached through a router et
74. 000 272 No No Autores Enabled 2 AUTO 200000 2 2 No No Autores Enabled 3 AUTO 200000 2 2 NoNo Autores Enabled 4 AUTO 200000 2 2 No No Autores Enabled 5 ALUTO 200000 2 2 Notio Auto Yes Enabled 6 ALUTO 200000 2 2 Autores Enabled 7 AUTO 200000 2 2 Autores Enabled 8 AUTO 200000 2 2 No No Enabled a ALUTO 200000 2 2 Nofo Autores Enabled 10 AUTO 200000 2 2 No No Auto Yes Enabled 11 AUTO 200000 2 2 Autores Enabled 12 AUTO200000 2 2 Auto Yes Enabled 13 AUTOV200000 2 2 No No Autores Enabled 14 ALUTO 200000 2 2 No No Autores Enabled 15 AUTO 200000 2 2 Notio Autores Enabled 16 0 200000 22 No No Autores Enabled 17 AUTO 200000 2 2 No No Auto Yes Enabled 18 ALITO 200000 2 2 Namo Auto Yas Enabled 19 AUTOY200000 2 2 Natio Autonas Enabled 20 AUTO200000 22 AutofYes Enabled 21 ALTO 200000 2 2 Auto Yes Enabled 22 AUTOY200000 2 2 Autores Enabled 23 AUTO 200000 2 2 Autores Enabled 24 ALTO 200000 22 No No Autores Enabled Figure 6 33 STP Port Settings and MSTP Port Information Table In addition to setting Spanning Tree parameters for use on the switch level the Switch allows for the configuration of groups of ports each port group of which will have its own spanning tree and will require some of its own configuration settings An STP Group will use the switch level parameters entered above with the addition of Port Priority and Port Cost An STP Group spanning tree works in t
75. 04052 Successfid login through Web Username Anonymous 13 2004 07 05 10 4027 Successful kam through Web Username Anonymous 12 2004 07 05 103944 Unit 1 Configuration saved to flash Username Anonymous 11 2004 07 05 103635 Unt 1 Success logn through Console Username Anonymous 10 2004 07 05 103423 Port 1 1 link up 100Mbps FULL duplex 9 2004 07 05 103422 Unit 1 System started up 3 2004 06 29 09 47 40 Unit 1 Firmware upgraded successfully Username Anonymous E 2004 06 29 09 46 24 Unt 1 Success logn through Console Username Anonymous 6 2004 06 29 0944 48 Port 11 ink up 100Mbps FULL duplex 5 2004 06 29 094448 Unit 1 System stated up 4 2004 06 25 115845 Unit 1 Fimnware upgraded successfully Usemame Anonymous 2004 06 25 115742 Unit 1 Successful logn through Console Username Anonymous 2 2004 06 25 115731 Port 1 1 link up 100 FULL duplex 1 2004 06 25 115730 Unit 1 System stated up Figure 9 18 Switch History window The Switch can record event information in its own logs to designated SNMP trap receiving stations and to the PC connected to the console manager Click Next to go to the next page of the Switch History Log Clicking Clear will allow the user to clear the Switch History Log The information is described as follows Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Parameter Description Sequence A counter incremented whenever an entry t
76. 2 1 priority value Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 10 Ethernet type value hex 0 0 0 the packet header The Ethernet type value may be set in the form hex 0x0 Oxffff which means the user may choose any combination of letters and numbers ranging from a f and from 0 9999 Profile ID Access ID Mode VLAN Name Source Mac Destination Mac 02 1p Ethernet Type Rule Entrie To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click Wiew in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen Access Rule Display Figure 6 69 Access Rule Display window Ethernet To configure the Access Rule for Packet Content Mask open the Access Profile Table and click Modify for a Packet Content Mask entry This will open the following screen Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 82 Access Rule Table Profile ID Mode Permit Packet Content Figure 6 70 Access Rule Table Packet Content Mask To remove a previously created rule select it and click the X button To add a new Access Rule click the Add button Access Rule Configuration Profile ID 4 Access ID 5 Pem Deny Packet Contest Mask Replace Pnonty with Replace Dscp withi 63 f Type Priarity 0 7 mask value 0 15 we mask mask value 16 31 task mask mask ma
77. 3 IP Networking folder open the OSPF folder and click on the OSPF General Setting link To enable OSPE first supply an OSPF Route ID see below select Enabled from the State drop down menu and click the Apply button OSPF Global Settings OSPF Route ID 0 000 Current Route ID 0 0 0 0 Auto selected Apply Figure 6 111 OSPF Global Settings window The following parameters are used for general OSPF configuration Parameter Description OSPF Route ID A 32 bit number in the same format as an IP address xxx xxx xxx xxx that uniquely identifies the Switch in the OSPF domain It is common to assign the highest IP address assigned to the Switch router In this case it would be 10 53 13 189 but any unique 32 bit number will do If 0 0 0 0 is entered the highest IP address assigned to the Switch will become the OSPF Route ID Current Route ID Displays the OSPF Route ID currently in use by the Switch This Route ID is displayed as a convenience to the user when changing the Switch s OSPF Route ID State Allows OSPF to be enabled or disabled globally on the Switch without changing the OSPF configuration OSPF Area ID Setting This menu allows the configuration of OSPF Area IDs and to designate these areas as either Normal or Stub Normal OSPF areas allow Link State Database LSDB advertisements of routes to networks that are external to the area Stub areas do not allow the LSDB advertisement of external routes Stub areas use
78. 33 Admin and User Privileges reris qst IE De pice Qe EUM eyed wg ware io ale REPRE Ne E 134 Access Authentication Control ODE MP wea Boge pte 135 Policy 8 Parameters v Seca ees pete Usi De UNI RU fu E eee tenant inks ok Sieh es ahs AX i eni de MURS RI A ERE USE ea ds 135 Application s Authentication e Rae Re EE TE CEXETA eit Op Reh E 136 Authentication Server Group Settings ces BEER E dran EE VR UI Re Sas eae eR ecu Aah raed a ey A a t on EE 136 Authentication Server Hosts M ae pe EE RS REM dE A AA E ER RENE ig IAE I repe epp E aes 138 Login Method Lists eie pete Me po PEE t Must teet godes ees teo A dee EE the EE Cete ica ite oS EAE 139 EE HEEN 140 Local Enable Passwords cise ce hee teet ee dh Ee dr Bard ws De EA TY ER IER eet tat oett ee 141 EnableAdmini ee e 2 pence 0454 exe e iis rtt fedes EE 142 Secure Socket Layer SSI sing se etd Et IRIS ec ated tls n aul ANS VA ERA Me Mate MAN E DN Ea AA ER I ei 143 Download Gertificate ner ADoser se ve quet EELER 143 Configuration 25i e sei E DM rcr ser cei Me qu RE Ee cuius entendr
79. 4 16 145 62 Kifisia Tel 30 210 6234 200 Fax 30 210 6234 209 Italy North Allied Telesyn International S r l Via Anna Kuliscioff 37 20152 Milano Tel 39 02 41304 1 Fax 39 02 41304 200 Italy East Tel 39 348 1522583 Tel amp Fax 39 049 8868175 Italy South Allied Telesyn International S r l Via Troilo il Grande 3 00131 Roma Tel 39 06 41294507 Fax 39 06 41404801 Turkey Allied Telesyn International 6 Cadde 61 2 06460 Ankara Tel 90 312 472 1054 55 Fax 90 312 472 1056 Germany South Allied Telesyn International GmbH Zeppelinstr 85399 Hallbergmoos Tel 49 81 1 999 37 0 Fax 49 81 1 999 37 22 Germany Koln Allied Telesyn GmbH West Edmund Rumpler Str 6b 51149 Koln Deutschand Tel 49 02203 1019685 Fax 49 02203 1019678 Denmark Allied Telesyn Internationa Jyllinge ErhvervsCenter Mollehaven 8 DK 4040 Jyllinge Tel 45 46734835 Fax 45 46734837 Finland Allied Telesyn International Ltd Mets nneidonkuja 10 02130 ESPOO Tel 358 9 7255 5290 Fax 358 9 7255 5299 Iceland 47 22 70 04 70 Ireland Freephone 800 409 127 The Netherlands Allied Telesyn International BV Hoeksteen 26 2132 MS Hoofddorp Tel 31 20 6540 246 Fax 31 20 6540 249 Norway Allied Telesyn International Ole Deviksvei 4 0666 Oslo Tel 47 22 70 04 70 Fax 47 22 70 04 01 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Swi
80. 6 SSH User window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 147 Parameter Description User Name Auth Mode Host Name Host IP Enter a User Name of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user This User Name must be a previously configured user account on the Switch The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users attempting to access the Switch Host Based This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a remote SSH server for authentication purposes Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user Host Name Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user Host IP Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user Password This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use an administrator defined password for authentication Upon entry of this parameter the Switch will prompt the administrator for a password and then to re type the password for confirmation Public Key This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use the publickey on a SSH server for authentication Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Enter the c
81. 724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 95 The following fields can be set Parameter Description Key ID A number from to 255 used to identify the MD5 Key Key A alphanumeric string of between and 16 case sensitive characters used to generate the Message Digest which is in turn used to authenticate OSPF packets within the OSPF routing domain Click Apply to enter the new Key ID settings To delete a Key ID entry click the corresponding X under the Delete heading Route Redistribution Settings Route redistribution allows routers on the network which are running different routing protocols to exchange routing information This is accomplished by comparing the routes stored in the various routers routing tables and assigning appropriate metrics This information is then exchanged among the various routers according to the individual routers current routing protocol The Switch can redistribute routing information between the OSPF and RIP routing protocols to all routers on the network that are running OSPF or RIP Routing information entered into the Static Routing Table on the local AT 9724TS switch is also redistributed Routing information source OSPF and the Static Route table Routing information will be redistributed to RIP The following table lists the allowed values for the routing metrics and the types or forms of the routing information that will be redistributed Route Source Metric Type OSPF Oto
82. 92 Support e mail Address Yug Servis Q alliedtelesyn com Russia and former Soviet Union Countries Support Telephone number 7 095 935 8585 Support Fax Number 7 095 935 8586 Support e mail Address support_ClS alliedtelesyn ru Ukraine Support Telephone number 7 095 935 8585 Support Fax Number 7 095 935 8586 Support e mail Address Ukraine support alliedtelesyn com All other countries not listed above should refer their technical support request to Support Telephone number 31 20 711 4333 Support e mail Address europe support QAalliedtelesyn com Americas Technical Support by Phone or Fax 8 5 PST M F Toll free 800 428 4835 Fax 425 481 3790 Support for Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands is provided through our Technical Support Center in Latin America M xico e mail soporte mexico galliedtelesyn com Tel fono 52 55 5559 0611 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Returning Products Products for return or repair must first be assigned a Return Materials Authorization RMA number RMA policy varies from country to country Please check the applicable RMA policy at www alliedtelesyn com For Europe you can also contact our European Customer Service centre by e mail at rma_europe alliedtelesyn com FTP Server If you need management software for an Allied Telesyn managed device you can download the software by connecting directly to our FTP server at ftp
83. AM d uela ael 84 Understanding 802 x Port based and MAC based Network Access Control hehehe e e e e e een 84 Port Based Network Access Control uc iii sed eek epe hex e ep SONA EERE RARE ERRARE EE INR ET ex nr S Po dp Rer Sd aee qae e 85 MAC Based Network Access ET STEE EE EROR ET OF es Fp KE EE 85 Configure Authenticator ojo ss diet ete ok oe Malas Mo ete e e Eon S SHE Iu Imo RIA Oe du eee Ro i CA OME A 86 Local KE Anma e qon he Rr rs Peer Ret Re ER Ra M Fasten n oro hf eC CE T DOR p CEU UCET POR Fred e rice Spb 87 PAE REES 88 Port Capability Settings cesta elt RE REIR Nt IR EE EE din Se RUE QUEE 88 Initializing Ports for Port Based 802 1x 2256 oos usui e red ep odes RR Om Ms A re His ae d OF UE Ie te od Oa E quarts 89 Initializing Ports for MAC Based 8027 X ois sss erm Ee DEA EE Uere rr RPM e ETE ps EEIE E rsen RR Etpe Ead e RE SON a 90 Reauthenticat Port s for Port Based 8021X es c eec PEINE de UNS LI eer NEL EE AE INI peste ILU 90 Reauthenticate Port s for MAC Based 802 1x epp e eR RE MEE rU e E NEEN
84. All IGMP Interface Figure 6 131 IGMP Interface Configuration window This window allows the configuration of IGMP for each IP interface configured on the Switch IGMP can be configured as Version or 2 by toggling the Version field using the pull down menu The length of time between queries can be varied by entering a value between and 65 535 seconds in the Query Interval field The maximum length of time between the receipt of a query and the sending of an IGMP response report can be varied by entering a value in the Max Response Time field The Robustness Variable field allows IGMP to be tuned for sub networks that are expected to lose a lot of packets A high value max 255 for the robustness variable will help compensate for lossy sub networks A low value min 2 should be used for less lossy sub networks The following fields can be set Parameter Description Interface Name IP Address Version Query Interval Max Response Time Robustness Variable Last Member Query Interval State Displays the name of the IP interface that is to be configured for IGMP This must be a previously configured interface Displays the IP address corresponding to the IP interface name above Enter the IGMP version 1 or 2 that will be used to interpret IGMP queries on the interface Allows the entry of a value between and 65535 seconds with a default of 125 seconds This specifies the length o
85. Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Parameter Description STP Status STP Version Hello Time 0 sec Max Age 6 40 sec Forward Delay 4 30 sec Max Hops 1 20 TX Hold Count 1 10 Forwarding BPDU Click Apply to implement changes made Use the pull down menu to enable or disable STP globally on the Switch The default is Disabled Use the pull down menu to choose the desired version of STP to be implemented on the Switch There are three choices STP Select this parameter to set the Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally on the switch RSTP Select this parameter to set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally on the Switch MSTP Select this parameter to set the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP globally on the Switch The Hello Time can be set from to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge This field will only appear here when STP or RSTP is selected for the STP Version For the Hello Time must be set on a port per port basis See the MST Port Settings section for further details The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in deter
86. Broadcast and Unicast Packets Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Transmitted TX Click the Transmitted TX link in the Packets folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of packets transmitted from the Switch select a port to view these statistics for first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 160 Part pph D 2 5 gt ae Geer View Table terva 15 Naurrber 200 ShowHite Bytes I Packers Figure 9 7 Tx Packets Analysis window line graph for Bytes and Packets To view the Transmitted TX Table click the link View Table which will show the following table New Lane Chart Unit 1 Port PortS mens Packets 52345 Ill 5 Unicast j Mulbcast l 4 7644 7544 Broadcast 44 Bytes Packets Figure 9 8 Tx Packets Analysis window table for Bytes and Packets
87. Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified Member Ports These are the ports on the Switch that will have a multicast router attached to them Click Apply to implement the new settings click the Show All Static Router Port Entries link to return to the Current Static Router Port Entries window 6 11 Spanning Tree This Switch supports three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol 802 14 STP 802 Iw Rapid STP and 802 15 MSTP 802 14 STP will be familiar to most networking professionals However since 802 1 w RSTP 802 15 MSTP has been recently introduced to Allied Telesyn managed Ethernet switches a brief introduction to the technology is provided below followed a description of how to set 802 14 STP 802 Iw RSTP and 802 15 MSTP 802 15 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol or MSTP is a standard defined by the IEEE community that allows multiple VLANs to be mapped to a single spanning tree instance which will provide multiple pathways across the network Therefore these MSTP configurations will balance the traffic load preventing wide scale disruptions when a single spanning tree instance fails This will allow for faster convergences of new topologies for the failed instance Frames designated for these VLANs will be processed quickly and completely throughout interconnected bridges utilizing either of the three spanning tree protocols STP RSTP or MSTP This protocol will also tag BDPU p
88. Class C network but custom subnet masks are allowed Default Gateway IP address that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet should be sent This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway If your network is not part of an intranet or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your local network you can leave this field unchanged Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 29 VLAN Name This allows the entry of a VLAN Name from which a management station will be allowed to manage the Switch using TCP IP in band via web manager or Telnet Management stations that are on VLANs other than the one entered here will not be able to manage the Switch in band unless their IP addresses are entered in the Security IP Management menu If VLANs have not yet been configured for the Switch the default VLAN contains all of the Switch s ports There are no entries in the Security IP Management table by default so any management station that can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a management VLAN is specified or Management Station IP Addresses are assigned Click Apply to let your changes take effect Setting the Switch s IP Address using the Console Interface Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Swi
89. Current System Log Server window click the corresponding X under the Delete heading of the entry to delete To return to the Current System Log Servers window click the Show All System Log Servers link Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 73 6 20 SNTP Settings Current Time Settings To configure the time settings for the Switch open the Configuration folder then the SNTP folder and click on the Current Time Setting link revealing the following screen for the user to configure Current Time Status System Boot Time Current Time Time Source system Clock Current Time SNTP Settings SNTP State SNTP Primary Server Disabled 0 0 0 0 SNTP Secondary Server 0 0 0 0 SNTP Poll Interval in Seconds 30 99999 720 Apply ear 2002 0 00 D 00 D 00 ime in HH MM SS Apply Figure 6 58 Time Settings Page The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description Current Time Status System Boot Time Displays the time when the Switch was initially started for this session Current Time Displays the current time Time Source Displays the source of the time settings viewed here Current Time SNTP Settings SNTP State SNTP Primary Server SNTP Secondary Server SNTP Poll Interval in Seconds 30 99999 Use this pull down menu to Enable or Disable SNTP This is the IP address of the primary server the SNTP information w
90. DR BDR is accomplished using the Hello protocol The router with the highest OSPF priority on a given multi access segment will become the DR for that segment In case of a tie the router with the highest Router ID wins The default OSPF priority is priority of zero indicates a router that cannot be elected as the DR Building Adjacency Two routers undergo a multi step process in building the adjacency relationship The following is a simplified description of the steps required Down No information has been received from any router on the segment Attempt On non broadcast multi access networks such as Frame Relay or 25 this state indicates that no recent information has been received from the neighbor An effort should be made to contact the neighbor by sending Hello packets at the reduced rate set by the Poll Interval Init The interface has detected a Hello packet coming from a neighbor but bi directional communication has not yet been established Two way Bi directional communication with a neighbor has been established The router has seen its address in the Hello packets coming from neighbor At the end of this stage the DR and BDR election would have been done At the end of the Two way stage routers will decide whether to proceed in building an adjacency or not The decision is based on whether of the routers is a DR or a or the link is a point to point or virtual link Exstart Ex
91. Determines whether regular reauthentication will take place on this port The default setting is Disabled Click Apply to implement your configuration changes To view configurations for the 802 1 X Authenticator Settings on a port by port basis see the 802 1X Authenticator Settings table Local Users In the configuration folder open the Port Access Entity folder and click Local users to open the 802 1 Local User Table Configuration window This window will allow the user to set different local users on the Switch 802 1x Local User Table Configuration User Name Password Confirm Password nger App Total Entries 1 802 1x Local User Table User Name Password Delete Figure 6 77 802 1 Local User Table Configuration and 802 1 Local User Table window Enter a User Name Password and confirmation of that password Properly configured local users will be displayed in the 802 1x Local User Table in the same window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 87 PAE System Control Existing 802 1x port settings are displayed and can be configured using the windows below Port Capability Settings Click Port Access Entity gt PAE System Control gt 802 1 X Capability Settings to view the following window 021 Capability Settings o Capability Apply 692 1 Capability Table erg 1 None 2 None 3 None 4 None 5 None 6 None 7 Non
92. EED 6 8 68 KKK KK KKK 6 6 SG GG fw Port Egress 1 509 Ie I Apply Show Multicast Forwarding Entries Figure 6 36 Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified VID TheVLAN ID of the VLAN the corresponding MAC address belongs to Multicast MAC Address The MAC address of the static source of multicast packets This must be a multicast MAC address Port Allows the selection of ports that will be members of the static multicast group The options are None No restrictions on the port dynamically joining the multicast group When None is chosen the port will not be a member of the Static Multicast Group Egress The port is a static member of the multicast group Click Apply to implement the changes made To delete an entry in the Static Multicast Forwarding Table click the corresponding X under the Delete heading Click the Show Multicast Forwarding Entries link to return to the Static Multicast Forwarding Settings window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 53 6 14 VLANs Understanding IEEE 802 Ip Priority Priority tagging is a function defined by the IEEE 802 1 standard designed to provide a means of managi
93. FQ 57 Tagging and Wntagging os oere nanta occid e dr SEELEN EN Ns Oe ide ese te OER Ce SAIS SAME ENG Me Oe dS eae Mata d CPE aac he ae 57 Ingress Filtering am Ti She entes EE 57 Default VEAINC seda eR ES RE KR EK EE Cu EE ORE RO oh EUS COUN EERE Le EE ENEE Ane kA ERI E QN EADS WR o i ow 57 2 2 oe ERA ae FO CA OW RE A Qe RADE de ENE S ERE COST EY KR EENSS ER EAA DEE FERNER ER REE lee 58 VLAIN Segmentation 30 5c RENI EE IR USD es decent EE da m fm o mam Ae Rc Dieu da QU AD SEE AS eet 58 VEAN and Trunk Groups santas seve ERI UR RR Tem Eder epe ge fons es En eines etr eeu do EE Prae ENEE p ipte inea anette 58 Protocol VLAMS SEER WE V Exi RE NN IE WE AGEN AE NP SX REEL ME QU Cd ORES OSA E da DER Ee gs 59 Static VLAN Entry EE EE 59 GVRP Setting 42 EE EE EE EE 62 draffie Control Raters obe Rata Rx ERR OP RR A ERR E Ren P KE Ge Oe Ga eal le Ee AS RE 63 POPE eund RUNI E etat EE e A LA dede c culus E an Ou D tb oc te Ic addet ro uto Reg 64 Port Lock Entries 2325 Ca o COOLE RO e CO RUE DOO RN ENEE EXE OCHO Se EO e 65 QOS LEER C EI 66 The Advantages
94. Frames Tx The number of user data frames transmitted on this port during the session ID A unique identifier for the session in the form of a printable ASCII string of at least three characters Authentic Method Time Terminate Cause UserName The authentication method used to establish the session Valid Authentic Methods include Remote Authentic Server The Authentication Server is external to the Authenticator s System Local Authentic Server The Authentication Server is located within the Authenticator s System The duration of the session in seconds The reason for the session termination There are eight possible reasons for termination l Supplicant Logoff Port Failure Supplicant Restart Reauthentication Failure AuthControlledPortControl set to ForceUnauthorized Port re initialization Port Administratively Disabled 90 gs Ur dei Zei Not Terminated Yet The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant PAE Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 174 Authenticator Diagnostics This table contains the diagnostic information regarding the operation of the Authenticator associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Diagnostics click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Diagnostics Figure 9 26 Authenticator Diagnostics window The user ca
95. Header is shown below OSPF Link State Advertisement Header Octets 0 2 3 4 Link State Age Link State Type Link State ID Advertising Router Link State Sequence Number Link State Checksum Length Field Figure 6 106 Link State Advertisement Header Description Link State Age Options Link State Type Link State ID Advertising Router Link State Sequence Number Link State Checksum Length The time is seconds since the link state advertisement was originated The optional capabilities supported by the described portion of the routing domain The type of the link state advertisement Each link state type has a separate advertisement format The link state type are as follows Router Links Network Links Summary Link IP Network Summary Link ASBR AS External Link This field identifies the portion of the internet environment that is being described by the advertisement The contents of this field depend on the advertisement s Link State Type The Router ID of the router that originated the Link State Advertisement For example in network links advertisements this field is set to the Router ID of the network s Designated Router Detects old or duplicate link state advertisements Successive instances of a link state advertisement are given successive Link State Sequence numbers The Fletcher checksum of the complete contents of the link state advertisement including the link state advertisement header by
96. High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch AT 9724TS Installation and User s Guide PN D617 10032 Rev Copyright 2004 Allied Telesyn Inc 19800 North Creek Parkway Suite 200 Bothell WA 98011 USA All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced without prior written permission from Allied Telesyn Inc All product names company names logos or other designations mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Allied Telesyn Inc reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior written notice The information provided herein is subject to change without notice In no event shall Allied Telesyn Inc be liable for any incidental special indirect or consequential damages whatsoever including but not limited to lost profits arising out of or related to this manual or the information contained herein even if Allied Telesyn Inc has been advised of known or should have known the possibility of such damages Electrical Safety and Emission Statement Standards This product meets the following standards CE Marking Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Important Appendix B contains translated safety statements for installing this equipment When you see the go to Appendi
97. KATKAISULAITTEENA VIRTA KATKAISTAAN irrottamalla virtajohto S HK TYYPPILUOKAN I LAITTEET TAMA LAITE T YTYY MAADOITTAA Pistoke t ytyy liitt kunnollisesti maadoitettuun pistorasiaan Virheellisesti johdotettu pistorasia voi altistaa met alliosat vaarallisille j nnitteille PISTORASIAAN KYTKETT V LAITE pistorasia on asennettava laitteen l helle ja siihen on oltava esteet n p sy HUOMAUTUS llmavaihtoreiki ei pid tukkia ja niill t ytyy olla vapaa yhteys ymp r iv n huoneilmaan jotta ilmanvaihto tapahtuisi K YTT L MP TILA T m tuote on suunniteltu ymp r iv n ilman maksimil mp tilalle 40 MAAT Asenna tuote paikallisten ja kansallisten sahkoturvallisuusmaaraysten mukaisesti Standard Questo prodotto conforme ai seguenti standard PERICOLO DI FULMINI PERICOLO NON LAVORARE sul dispositivo o sui CAVI durante PRECIPITAZIONI TEMPORALESCHE 2 ATTENZIONE IL CAVO DI ALIMENTAZIONE USATO COME DISPOSITIVO DI DISATTIVAZIONE PER TOGLIERE LA COR RENTE AL DISPOSITIVO staccare il cavo di alimentazione 3 AN ELETTRICIT DISPOSITIVI DI CLASSE 1 QUESTO DISPOSITIVO DEVE AVERE LA MESSA A TERRA La spina deve essere inserita in una presa di corrente specifi camente dotata di messa a terra Una presa non cablata in maniera corretta rischia di scaricare una tensione pericolosa su parti metalliche accessibili 4 APPARECCHIATURA COLLEGABILE la presa va ins
98. LA ot ES e 180 Browse OSPF LSDB Tables 5 5 rere rt uA C UPAG AT FRE s Dices Ubi br A E EE popuii ems nare 180 Browse OSPR Neighbor Table sooo UE S EE ese A Rar lod get E ud 181 5 Neighbors 181 SAS SE AE EI MM DUI E CIUOU T eet eked d a ed Ee Cd EE oras bee EO 182 Browse DVMRP Routing Table 1 oen re Dee prre EEN eive a ee opel eoo ER P Rice Rx E esee sa GO V EUER Paine RE ei a dle a a NEN AT EE 182 Browse DVMRP Neighbor Address Table isi ee ub i eI ER EIER X Saree we S ATE LIE Wen PISA Me ea Saree woe tarda IN Seer np iMd 182 Browse DVMBP Routing Next Hop Table A8 4 W errem ad es t ence E Gon BG gtd A ORDRRNEQGRSRRSIUREe LEM ERG Ee aa od SRM 183 Moritering 3 n snp oS ime SR NU NR su di UE e a ERAS D A RM em nde 183 PIM N ighbor Address Table 5 2 si ne epe DPI HS a Den SE EE dare Dahle inb A 183 Switch Maintenance Base EE Download Firmware Download Configuration tone reete dara inte de te E RE EA Die EE tater enero LIEU a s ecd a 184 Uplead Configuration ic p coe ie ice ket be Re ise EENEG 185 Upload
99. Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 16 Chapter 3 Connecting the Switch 3 Switch to End Node 3 2 Switch to Hub or Switch 3 3 Connecting to Network Backbone or Server 3 4 Stacking and the AT 9724TS 3 1 Switch To End Node End nodes include PCs outfitted with 10 100 or 1000Mbps RJ45 Ethernet Network Interface Card NIC and most routers An end node can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair UTP STP cable The end node should be connected to any of the 24 1000 ports of the Switch 3 JOOS im RJ 45 Connector Figure 3 Switch connected to an end node The Link Act LEDs for each UTP port will light green or amber when the link is valid A blinking LED indicates packet activity on that port 3 2 Switch to Hub or Switch These connections can be accomplished in a number of ways using a normal cable hub or switch can be connected the Switch via a twisted pair Category 3 4 5 UTP STP cable A 100TX hub or switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 5 UTP STP cable A 1000T switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 5e UTP STP cable switch supporting a fibre optic uplink connected to the Switch s SFP ports via fibre optic cabling 9724 5
100. Maintenance 10 TFTP Services 10 2 Multiple Image Services 10 3 CF Services 10 4 Ping Test 10 5 Save Changes 10 6 Reset 10 7 Reboot Services 10 8 Logout 10 1 TFTP Service Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP services allow the Switch s firmware to be upgraded by transferring a new firmware file from a TFTP server to the Switch A configuration file can also be loaded into the Switch from a TFTP server switch settings can be saved to the TFTP server and a history log can be uploaded from the Switch to the TFTP server Download Firmware To update the Switch s firmware open the TFTP Services folder in the Maintenance folder and then click the Download Firmware link Download Firmwa Unit Number Iv ALL Image ID S Address 0 0 0 Start Figure 10 Download Firmware window Unit ID Select which switch of a switch stack you want to update the firmware on This allows the selection of a particular switch from a switch stack if you have installed the optional stacking module and have properly interconnected the switches indicates all switches in a switch stack will download the same firmware Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the Server IP Address field Select the Image ID of the firmware The AT 9724TS can hold two firmware images in its memory Image ID will always be the boot up firmware for the Switch unless specified by the user Information on configuring Image IDs can be fou
101. N and therefore IP interface on the Switch VRRP routers within the same VRRP group must be consistent in configuration settings for this protocol to function optimally VRRP Configuration To enable VRRP globally on the Switch click Configuration gt Layer 3 IP Networking gt VRRP gt VRRP Global Settings VRRP Global Settings Global VRRP Disabled Non owner response PING o sabled D Apply Figure 6 126 VRRP Global Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Global VRRP Use the pull down menu to enable or disable VRRP globally on the Switch The default is Disabled Non owner response PING Enabling this parameter will allow the virtual IP address to be pinged from other host end nodes to verify connectivity This will only enable the ping connectivity check function This command is Disabled by default Click Apply to implement changes made Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 125 VRRP Interface Settings The following window will allow the user to view the parameters for the VRRP function on the Switch view this window click Configuration gt Layer 3 IP Networking gt VRRP gt VRRP Configuration VRRP Configuration Interface Name Authentication type Display Delete No Authentication Figure 6 127 VRRP Configuration window The following fields are displayed in the window above Parameter Description
102. O o 7 Contacting Allied Telesyn Technical Support z iie RES SE y f e e ETERNA E EIE RA EE E dic e 7 Returning PFOdUCtS eg epe E e BE M adm taste teme Db emt eM iu ag a eie E te Me EE de Bio Ci aod OS ac arde 8 Ser btts oos ede eek ROCK P Ve e EVE e D RON RP RT 8 For Sales or Corporate Information ine 2 orem edades e c totes ee beet e Qe Ce DNS ee rd el EE eigen Cad eR ears ae d NET OY dz EE 8 Tells What You EE ass boxe ehn ERE E ERE ERREUR OS EORR GR Hema EO EYE E EO CO EPI HER NER EMS 9 Introduetioi ouo vx gs ERE CPC Be SEALS EE 10 Fast Eth rneto e ls Sa ee eee EE A QM ERE EE E RERO ENNIO ESN RENS EN Gy EARDER ERE REY ERE ROCK ER a 10 Gigabit Ethernet Technology ace Moped e ped euentu db ete teg Ste uad Me Geld hae bles alee Ms A geleet 10 Switching Technology utes te eph tees te pha ber PEREAT wed Sm ese eere eger e Pea ple Ups Fr elles rs naue p rece fais hers aig See 10 Switch Descriptions rez e teens Ate re EE EE EE Ae e a A 11 PORTS helene e PORE REC Eod ENEE EC SPIN ER EDAD Ee KE Eed 12 Installing hrer E
103. OSPF Monitoring folder by clicking on the Browse OSPF Neighbor Table link Routers that are connected to the same area or segment become neighbors in that area Neighbors are elected via the Hello protocol multicast is used to send out Hello packets to other routers on the segment Routers become neighbors when they see themselves listed in a Hello packet sent by another router on the same segment In this way two way communication is guaranteed to be possible between any two neighbor routers This table displays OSPF neighbors of the Switch IIP Address OSPF Neighbor Table INeighbor Router ID T State Option Prority State Ich hanges Address Total Entries 0 Figure 9 35 OSPF Neighbor Table To search for OSPF neighbors enter an IP address and click Find Valid OSPF neighbors will appear in the OSPF Neighbor Table below OSPF Virtual Neighbor This table can be found in the OSPF Monitoring folder by clicking on the Browse OSPF Virtual Neighbor link This table displays a list of Virtual OSPF Neighbors of the Switch The user may choose specifically search a virtual neighbor by using one of the two search options at the top of the screen which are Parameter Description Transit Area ID Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID previously defined on the Switch that allows a remote area to communicate with the backbone area 0 A Transit Area cannot be a Stub Area or a Backbone Area Neighbor ID The OSPF rout
104. R DOLES eee e sme SPUR UN RE e US ard ne ee nt BAO ERSTE ea tn RAO MAGA et uU UU SIR US DIAS 12 v bee HER Fo Gia lee Suey REETA EEE Berg 12 EE ert I EE AGE EE VEDI Ord EA E BE EDEN ERE a Na wu EO NUE a a ACESS NM d 13 Rear Panel Components Sel ER m ELEME ERES dE INLINE GE NS LR ERI Es 13 Side Panel Comporients osea tese EE beUa Dod M iit tete Medo Teas eee OS eere de e teas 14 Installation ceo pour eir eoe eene ge 14 Package Contents iP 14 Before Tou Connect to tlie NetWork raseras EERE ESKOM E SE e AA PYRE Ea FEIN ER EE PATS CR BA QUIA TID AXES EDGY pd E 14 Installinghe Switch Without the Rack Zeg serge ATI unge Se Hate a ei ue RR e RUP aas be He Gnome ENEE ENEE Da en ha 15 Installing the Switehina Rack Sc eoe pros sov E e AN Um TON edt e SE Case AM e Ok wate EAR ANE E e QUE l6 Mounting the Switeh m a Standard 19 Ra EE EE EE RECO SA AUR Ee EO EO CI Y RN l6 Power Ok QUI pee TASER Eed OLR GREED RG ER OP n UOS CUI BAG BEER EROS CUIU RH Een URN MP aT l6 Power Fa
105. Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason RADIUS Accounting This window shows managed objects used for managing RADIUS accounting clients and the current statistics associated with them It has one row for each RADIUS authentication server that the client shares a secret with To view the RADIUS Accounting click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Accounting Katzen Figure 9 28 RADIUS Accounting window The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where 5 clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left hand corner stands for seconds The default value is one second To The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Serverindex The identif
106. Route Preference Settings Route Preference is a way for routers to select the best path when there are two or more different routes to the same destination from two different routing protocols The majority of routing protocols are not compatible when used in conjunction with each other This Switch supports and may be configured for many routing protocols as a stand alone switch or more importantly in utilizing the stacking function and Single IP Management of the Switch Therefore the ability to exchange route information and select the best path is essential to optimal use of the Switch and its capabilities The first decision the Switch will make in selecting the best path is to consult the Route Preference Settings table of the switch This table can be viewed by clicking Configuration gt Layer 3 IP Networking gt Route Preference Settings and it holds the list of possible routing protocols currently implemented on the Switch along with a Preference value which determines which routing protocol will be the most dependable to route packets Below is a list of the default route preferences set on the Switch Route Type Validity Range Default Value Local 0 Permanently set on the switch and unconfigurable 0 Static 1 999 60 OSPF Intra 1 999 80 OSPF Inter 1 999 90 RIP 1 999 100 OSPF ExtT 1 999 110 OSPF ExtT2 1 999 115 Table 6 8 Route Preference Table As shown above Local will always be the first choice for routing purpose
107. SR NOT CFG no 5 USR NOT CFG pet JSR NOT CFG no 7 JSR NOT CFG no 8 UJSR NOT CFG no 3 USR NOT CFG pe JSR NOT CFG no 11 USR NOT CFG no IE EN JSR NOT CFG no Topology DUPLEX CHAIN My Box C Current Sate Box count Figure 9 15 Stacking Information window The Stacking Information window holds the following information Parameter Description Box ID Displays the Switch s order in the stack User Set Box ID can be assigned automatically Auto or can be assigned statically Default is Auto Type Displays the model name of the corresponding switch in a stack Exist Denotes whether a switch does or does not exist in a stack Priority Displays the priority ID of the Switch The lower the number the higher the priority The box switch with the Prom Version Runtime Version H W Version Topology My Box ID Current State Box Count lowest priority number the stack denotes the Master switch The AT 9724TS will always be the master switch in a Star topology Shows the PROM in use for the Switch This may be different from the values shown in the illustration Shows the firmware version in use for the Switch This may be different from the values shown in the illustrations Shows the hardware version in use for the Switch This may be different from the values shown in the illustration Show the current topology employed using this Switch Displays the Box ID of the Switch currentl
108. Set the RADIUS server IP Authentic Port Set the RADIUS authentic server s UDP port The default port is 1812 Accounting Port Set the RADIUS account server s UDP port The default port is 1813 Key Set the key the same as that of the RADIUS server Confirm Key Confirm the shared key is the same as that of the RADIUS server Status This allows you to set the RADIUS Server as Valid Enabled or Invalid Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 6 23 Layer 3 IP Networking Layer 3 Global Advanced Settings The L3 Global Advanced Settings window allows the user to enable and disable Layer 3 settings and functions from a single window The full settings and descriptions for these functions will appear later in this section view this window open the Configuration folder and then the Layer 3 IP Networking folder and click on the L3 Global Advanced Settings link to access the following window DVMRP State Disabled L3 Global Advanced Settings PIM DM State Disabled gt RIP State Disabled OSPF State Disabled xj ARP Aging Time 0 65535 Figure 6 84 L3 Global Advanced Settings window The user may set the following Parameter Description DVMRP State The user may globally enable or disable the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP function by using the pull down menu PIM DM State The user may globally enable or dis
109. To Month To Day To Time in HH MM Use this pull down menu to Enable or Disable the DST Settings Use this pull down menu to specify the amount of time that will constitute your local DST offset 30 60 90 or 120 minutes Use these pull down menus to specify your local time zone s offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October Enter the week of the month that DST will start Enter the day of the week that DST will start on Enter the month DST will start on Enter the time of day that DST will start on Enter the week of the month the DST will end Enter the day of the week that DST will end Enter the month that DST will end Enter the time DST will end Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 Enter the month DST will start on each year Enter the day of the month DST will start on each year Enter the time of day DST will start on each year Enter the month DST will end on each year Enter the day of the month DST will end on each year Enter the time of day that DST will
110. UM TRENNEN DER STROMVERSORGUNG ZUR TRENNUNG VOM NETZ KABEL AUS DER STECKDOSE ZIEHEN 3 AN GERATE DER KLASSE DIESE GERATE M SSEN GEERDET SEIN Der Netzstecker darf nur mit einer vorschriftsmaBig geerdeten Steckdose verbunden werden Ein unvorschriftsmaBiger Anschlu kann die Metallteile des Gehauses unter gef hrliche elektrische Spannungen setzen 4 A STECKBARES GER T Die AnschluBbuchse sollte in der Nahe der Einrichtung angebrachtwerden und leicht zug nglich sein 5 VORSICHT Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch ER Die Entliftungsoffnungen d rfen nicht versperrt sein und m ssen zum K hlen freien Zugang zur Raumluft haben 6 A BETRIEBSTEMPERATUR Dieses Produkt wurde f r den Betrieb in einer Umgebungstemperatur von nicht mehr als 40 C entworfen 7 A ALLE LANDER Installation mu rtlichen und nationalen elektrischen Vorschriften entsprechen Standarder Dette produkt tilfredsstiller de f lgende standarder gt FARE UNDER UVEJR FARE UNDLAD at arbejde udstyr eller KABLER i perioder med LYNAKTIVITET 2 AN ADVARSEL DEN STR MF RENDE LEDNING BRUGES TIL AT AFBRYDE STR MMEN SKAL STR MMEN TIL APPARATET AFBRYDES tages ledningen ud af stikket 3 A ELEKTRISK KLASSE I UDSTYR DETTE UDSTYR KR VER JORDFORBINDELSE Stikket skal v re forbundet med en korrekt installeret jordforbunden stikkontakt En ukorrekt installeret stikkontakt kan s tte livsfarlig sp nding til tilg n
111. a default summary external route 0 0 0 0 or Area 0 to reach external destinations To set up an OSPF Area configuration click Configuration Layer 3 IP Networking OSPF OSPF Area ID Settings link to open the following dialog box OSPF Area Settings Area ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stuh Default Cost Normal D 4 OSPF Area ID Table Area ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost Delete 0000 Normal None Figure 6 112 OSPF Area ID Settings and Table window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 117 To add an OSPF Area to the table type a unique Area ID see below select the Type from the drop down menu For a Stub type choose Enabled or Disabled from the Stub Import Summary LSA drop down menu and determine the Stub Default Cost Click the Add Modify button to add the Area ID set to the table To remove an Area ID configuration set simply click X in the Delete column for the configuration To change an existing set in the list typ Area ID will appear in the table e the Area ID of the set you want to change make the changes and click the Add Modify button The modified OSPF OSPF Area Settings a ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost Sub s Enabled 2 OSPF Area ID Table Are a ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost Delete 0000 Normal None 10 53 13 94 Stub Enabled Figure 6 113 OSPF Are
112. a Setting Example window See the parameter descriptions below for information on the OSPF Area ID Settings The Area ID settings are as follows Parameter Description Area ID A 32 bit number in the form of an IP address xxx xxx xxx xxx that uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the OSPF domain Type This field be toggled between Normal and Stub using the space bar When it is toggled to Stub additional Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost fields appear Stub Import Summary LSA and Default Cost Displays whether or not the selected Area will allow Summary Link State Advertisements Summary LSAs to be imported into the area from other areas Displays the default cost for the route to the stub of between 0 and 65 535 The default is 1 OSPF Interface Settings To set up OSPF interfaces click Configuration gt Layer 3 IP Networking gt OSPF gt OSPF Interface Settings to view OSPF settings for existing IP interfaces If there are no IP interfaces configured besides the default System interface only the System interface settings will appear listed To change settings for in IP interface click on the hyperlinked name of the interface to see the configuration menu for that interface OSPF Inte rface Settings Name IP Address mm ID Auth Type State 10 53 13 126 0000 None Disabled System Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Figure 6 114 OSPF Interface Settings window Stackable Gigabit
113. abase Type Link ID Neighboring router s Router ID IP address of Designated Router IP network subnet number Neighboring router s Router ID Link Data Contents again depend on the link s Type field For connections to stub networks it specifies the network s IP address mask For unnumbered point to point connection it specifies the interface s MIB II iflndex value For other link types it specifies the router s associated IP interface address This latter piece of information is needed during the routing table build process when calculating the IP address of the next hop No of TOS The number of different Type of Service TOS metrics given for this link not counting the required metric for TOS 0 If no additional TOS metrics are given this field should be set to 0 TOS 0 Metric The cost of using this router link for TOS 0 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch For each link separate metrics may be specified for each Type of Service TOS The metric for TOS 0 must always be included and was discussed above Metrics for non zero TOS are described below Note that the cost for non zero TOS values that are not specified defaults to the TOS 0 cost Metrics must be listed in order of increasing TOS encoding For example the metric for TOS 16 must always follow the metric for TOS 8 when both are specified Field Description TOS IP Type of Service that this metric refers to Metric The cost of us
114. able Configuration window The SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous menu The following parameters can be set Parameter Description View Name Subtree OID View Type Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP view being created Type the Object Identifier OID Subtree for the view The OID identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager Select Included to include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Select Excluded to exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP View Table click the Show All SNMP View Table Entries link SNMP Group Table An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous menu To view the SNMP Group Table open the SNMP Manager folder and click the SNMP Group Table entry The following screen should appear Line Chart Unit 3 Part Pertt Teeter ies EI Spe NN LT i 7 Bytes ricas 44 t Mulicast Broadcast Bytes 3 4 Packets t Figure 8 6 SNMP Group Table To delete an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the corresponding X under the Delete heading
115. able entry of the IP interface This field may read OSPF Static or Local Represents the Backup state that this IP interface is configured for This field may read Primary or Backup Click the X if you would like to delete this entry from the Static Default Route Settings table To enter an IP Interface into the Switch s Static Default Routes window click the Add button revealing the following window to configure Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 97 StaticlDefault Route Settings Add IP Address 1000 Subnet Mask Primery Apply Show All Stapc Default Route Entries Figure 6 91 Static Default Route Settings Add window The following fields can be set Parameter Description IP Address Allows the entry of an IP address that will be a static entry into the Switch s Routing Table Subnet Mask Allows the entry of a subnet mask corresponding to the IP address above Gateway IP Allows the entry of an IP address of a gateway for the IP address above Metric 1 65535 Allows the entry of a routing protocol metric representing the number of routers between the Switch and the IP address above Backup State The user may choose between Primary and Backup If the Primary Static Default Route fails the Backup Route will support the entry Please take note that the Primary and Backup entries cannot have the same Gateway Click Apply to implement changes made
116. able the Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode PIM DM function by using the pull down menu RIP State The user may globally enable or disable the Routing Information Protocol RIP function by using the pull down menu OSPF State The user may globally enable or disable the Open Shortest Path first OSPF function by using the pull down menu ARP Aging Time 0 65535 The user may globally set the maximum amount of time in minutes that an Address Resolution Protocol ARP entry can remain in the Switch s ARP table without being accessed before it is dropped from the table The value may be set in the range of 0 65535 minutes with a default setting of 20 minutes Setting Up IP Interfaces Each VLAN must be configured prior to setting up the VLAN s corresponding IP interface An example is presented below VLAN Name VID Switch Ports System default 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 Engineer 2 9 10 11 12 Marketing 3 13 14 15 16 Finance 4 17 18 19 20 Sales 5 1 2 3 4 Backbone 6 25 26 Table 6 5 VLAN Example Assigned Ports In this case six IP interfaces are required so a CIDR notation of 10 32 0 0 11 a I I bit addressing scheme will work This addressing scheme will give a subnet mask of 11111111 11100000 00000000 00000000 binary or 255 224 0 0 decimal Using 0 xxx xxx xxx IP address notation the above example would give 6 network addresses and 6 subnets Any IP address from the allowed range of IP add
117. able the unwanted ciphersuites leaving the desired one for authentication When the SSL function has been enabled the web will become disabled To manage the Switch through the web based management while utilizing the SSL function the web browser must support SSL encryption and the header of the URL must begin with https Ex https 10 90 90 90 Any other method will result in an error and no access can be authorized for the web based management To view the following window click Security Management gt Secure Socket Layer SSL gt Configuration Configuration SSL Status Cache Timeout 60 86400 sec Ciphersuite RSA with RC4 128 MDS Enabled zl 0 0004 RSA with 3DES EDE CBC SHA Enabled zl Ox000a DHE DSS with 3DES SHA Enabled 0 0013 RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MDS Enabled D 0 0003 Apply Figure 7 22 Configuration and Ciphersuite window To set up the SSL function on the Switch configure the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Configuration SSL Status Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the SSL status on the switch The default is Disabled Cache Timeout 60 84600 This field will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using the SSL function A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange Specifying a longer timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections wi
118. ackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 85 Configure Authenticator To configure the 802 Authenticator Settings click PAE Access Entity gt Configure Authenticator 902 1X Authenticator Settings Unk 1 N X Nerve Port VER TxPar ed Ges mech MaxHoq il both Aug 0 60 20 30 2 360 N E bot Aug 20 60 30 30 2 360r N B bot Aug 20 60 30 0 2 160 N D boh Jue 20 60 30 30 2 3600 N 5 bot Au 60 0 30 2 IZ N E bot Aug 30 60 30 30 360r N D bot Aug 30 60 30 0 2 360 N E both Auge 60 30 2 360 N bot Aug 20 60 30 30 2 360r N 0 bot Auc 0 60 30 30 2 360r N i both Aug 0 60 20 0 2 360 N 12 both Aug 0 60 0 30 2 360 13 bet Aug 20 60 30 30 2 360 No 4 bot Aug 20 6 30 M 2 360 No H boh 30 60 30 30 2 360 N l5 both Aug 20 60 30 30 2 3600 N 7 Aug 30 60 0 30 2 360 N us boh Aug 20 60 30 30 2 360r No ns bot Aug 30 60 30 30 2 1600 No boh 30 60 30 30 1 360 No Ki boh Aug 30 60 30 30 2 360 No E boh Juge 60 30 2 MAN N bot Aur 30 60 30 30 2 3600 He both Aug 30 60 30 30 2 360 No Figure 6 75 802 X Authenticator Settings window To view the 802 1 X Authenticator settings on a different switch in the switch stack use the Unit pull down menu to select that switch by its ID number in the switch stack configure the settings by port click on the hyperlinked port number under the Port heading which will display the following table to configure 802 1X Authenticator
119. ackets so receiving devices can distinguish spanning tree instances spanning tree regions and the VLANs associated with them These instances will be classified by an MSTI ID MSTP will connect multiple spanning trees with a Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST will automatically determine each MSTP region its maximum possible extent and will appear as one virtual bridge that runs a single spanning tree Consequentially frames assigned to different VLANs will follow different data routes within administratively established regions on the network continuing to allow simple and full processing of frames regardless of administrative errors in defining VLANs and their respective spanning trees Each switch utilizing the MSTP on a network will have a single MSTP configuration that will have the following three attributes l A configuration name defined by an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters defined in the MST Configuration Table window in the Configuration Name field 2 A configuration revision number named here as a Revision Level and found in the MST Configuration Table window and 3 A 4096 element table defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Table window which will associate each of the possible 4096 VLANS supported by the Switch for a given instance To utilize the MSTP function on the Switch three steps need to be taken l The Switch must be set to the MSTP setting found in the STP Bridge Global Setti
120. ad write privileges using SNMPv3 Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional layer of security is available for SNMPv3 that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMPv3 settings for the Switch read the next section Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and Broadcast MMulticast Storm Management and counter information are stored by the Switch in the Management Information Base MIB The Switch uses the standard Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base The proprietary MIB may also be retrieved by specifying the MIB Object Identifier MIB values can be either read only or read write The AT 9724TS incorpo
121. age Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host The user may implement any one or combination of the ciphersuites available yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server The Switch supports SSLv3 and TLSvl Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host Download Certificate This window is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server The certificate file is data record used for authenticating devices on the network It contains information on the owner keys for authentication and digital signatures Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function The Switch only supports certificate files with der file extensions To view the following window click Security Management gt Secure Socket Laye
122. aightforward upgrade without wasting a company s existing investment in hardware software and trained personnel The increased speed and extra bandwidth offered by Gigabit Ethernet are essential to coping with the network bottlenecks that frequently develop as computers and their busses get faster and more users use applications that generate more traffic Upgrading key components such as your backbone and servers to Gigabit Ethernet can greatly improve network response times as well as significantly speed up the traffic between your subnetworks Gigabit Ethernet enables fast optical fibre connections to support video conferencing complex imaging and similar data intensive applications Likewise since data transfers occur 10 times faster than Fast Ethernet servers outfitted with Gigabit Ethernet NIC s are able to perform 10 times the number of operations in the same amount of time In addition the phenomenal bandwidth delivered by Gigabit Ethernet is the most cost effective method to take advantage of today and tomorrow s rapidly improving switching and routing internetworking technologies Switching Technology Another key development pushing the limits of Ethernet technology is in the field of switching technology switch bridges Ethernet packets at the MAC address level of the Ethernet protocol transmitting among connected Ethernet or Fast Ethernet LAN segments Switching is a cost effective way of increasing the total network capacity av
123. ailable to users on a local area network A switch increases capacity and decreases network loading by making it possible for a local area network to be divided into different segments which are not competing with each other for network transmission capacity and therefore decreasing the load on each segment The Switch acts as a high speed selective bridge between the individual segments Traffic that needs to go from one segment to another from one port to another is automatically forwarded by the Switch without interfering with any other segments ports This allows the total network capacity to be multiplied while still maintaining the same network cabling and adapter cards For Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet networks a switch is an effective way of eliminating problems of chaining hubs beyond the two repeater limit A switch can be used to split parts of the network into different collision domains for example making it possible to expand your Fast Ethernet network beyond the 205 meter network diameter limit for 100 networks Switches supporting both traditional OMbps Ethernet and 00Mbps Fast Ethernet are also ideal for bridging between existing OMbps networks and new 00Mbps networks Switching LAN technology is a marked improvement over the previous generation of network bridges which were characterized by higher latencies Routers have also been used to segment local area networks but the cost of a router and the setup and maint
124. an one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that 5 5 5 are separate entities and are not compatible with each other Login Method Lists This command will configure a user defined or default Login Method List of authentication techniques for users logging on to the Switch The sequence of techniques implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of techniques for example TACACS XTACACS local the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no response comes from the server host the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the local account database set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user When the local method is used the privilege level will be dependant on the local account privilege configured on the Switch Successful login using any of these techniques will give the user a User privilege only If the user wishes to upgrade his or her status to the administrator level the user must use the Enable Admin window in which the user must enter a previously configured password set by the administrator See the Enab
125. and web users will be disconnected from the Switch The user may set the number of attempts from to 255 The default setting is 3 Click Apply to implement changes made Application s Authentication Settings This window is used to configure switch configuration applications console Telnet SSH web for login at the user level and at the administration level Enable Admin utilizing a previously configured method list view the following window click Security Management gt Access Authentication Control gt Application Authentication Settings Application s Authentication Settings Application Login Method List Enable Method List default D default default default Figure 7 6 Application s Authentication Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Application Lists the configuration applications on the Switch The user may configure the Login Method List and Enable Method List for authentication for users utilizing the Console Command Line Interface application the Telnet application SSH and the WEB HTTP application Login Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Login Method Lists window in this section for more information Enable Method List Using the pull down men
126. arameters may be set Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified From To Select a port or group of ports to enable for MAC notification using the pull down menus State Enable MAC Notification for the ports selected using the pull down menu Click Apply to implement changes made 6 10 IGMP Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a subnetwork one router is elected as the querier This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given subnetwork or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnetwork If there are no members on a subnetwork packets will not be forwarded to that subnetwork IGMP Versions and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP ve
127. arameters may be set to configure an existing or new VRRP interface Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 126 Parameter Description Interface Name VRID 1 255 IP Address Admin State Priority 1 254 Enter the name of a previously configured IP interface to create a VRRP entry for This IP interface must be assigned to a VLAN on the Switch Enter a value between and 255 to uniquely identify this VRRP group on the Switch All routers participating in this group must be assigned the same VRID value This value MUST be different from other VRRP groups set on the Switch Enter the IP address that will be assigned to the VRRP router This IP address is also the default gateway that will be statically assigned to end hosts and must be set for all routers that participate in this group Used to enable Up and disable Down the VRRP IP interface on the Switch Enter a value between and 254 to indicate the router priority The VRRP Priority value may determine if a higher priority VRRP router overrides a lower priority VRRP router A higher priority will increase the probability that this router will become the Master router of the group A lower priority will increase the probability that this router will become the backup router VRRP routers that are assigned the same priority value will elect the highest physical IP address as the Master router The default value is 100 The value o
128. ary Figure 6 119 OSPF Aggregation Configuration Add window Specify the OSPF aggregation settings and click the Apply button to add or change the settings The new settings will appear listed in the OSPF Area Aggregation Settings table To view the table click the Show All OSPF Aggregation Entries link to return to the previous window Configure the following settings for OSPF Area Aggregation Parameter Description Area ID Allows the entry the OSPF Area ID for which the routing information will be aggregated This Area ID must be previously defined on the Switch Network Number Sometimes called the Network Address The 32 bit number in the form of an IP address that uniquely identifies the network that corresponds to the OSPF Area above Network Mask The corresponding network mask for the Network Number specified above LSDB Type Specifies the type of address aggregation which is set at Summary Advertisement Select Enabled or Disabled to determine whether the selected OSPF Area will advertise it s summary LSDB Network Number and Network Mask OSPF Host Route Settings OSPF host routes work in way analogous to RIP only this is used to share OSPF information with other OSPF routers This is used to work around problems that might prevent OSPF information sharing between routers Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 121 To configure OSPF host routes click
129. ary Name Server 0 0 0 0 DNSR Cache Status Disabled DNSR Static Table Status Disabled Apply Figure 6 124 DNS Global Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description DNS Relay Status This field can be toggled between Disabled and Enabled using the pull down menu and is used to enable or disable the DNS Relay service on the Switch Primary Name Server Allows the entry of the IP address of a primary domain name server DNS Secondary Name Server Allows the entry of the IP address of a secondary domain name server DNS DNSR Cache Status This can be toggled between Disabled and Enabled This determines if a DNS cache will be enabled on the Switch DNS Static Table Status This field can be toggled using the pull down menu between Disabled and Enabled This determines if the static DNS table will be used or not DNS Relay Static Settings To view the DNS Relay Static Settings open the DNS Relay folder in the Configuration folder and click the DNS Relay Static Settings link which will open the following window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 124 DNS Relay Static Settings Domain Name IP Address Apply DNS Relay Static Table Domain N ame IP Address Delete 10 53 13 94 Figure 6 125 DNS Relay Static Settings and Table window To add an entry into the DNS Relay Static Table simply enter a Domain Name with its corresponding IP address and cl
130. ase of all other routers in that area Routers that have interfaces connected to more than one area are called Border Routers and take the responsibility of distributing routing information between areas One area is defined as Area 0 or the Backbone This area is central to the rest of the network in that all other areas have a connection through a router to the backbone Only routers have connections to the backbone and OSPF is structured such that routing information changes in other areas will be introduced into the backbone and then propagated to the rest of the network When constructing a network to use OSPF it is generally advisable to begin with the backbone area 0 and work outward Link State Algorithm An OSPF router uses a link state algorithm to build a shortest path tree to all destinations known to the router The following is a simplified description of the algorithm s steps When OSPF is started or when a change in the routing information changes the router generates a link state advertisement This advertisement is a specially formatted packet that contains information about all the link states on the router e This link state advertisement is flooded to all router in the area Each router that receives the link state advertisement will store the advertisement and then forward a copy to other routers When the link state database of each router is updated the individual routers will calculate a Shortest Path Tree to all
131. ased scheduling any packets residing in the higher priority classes of service are transmitted first Multiple strict priority classes of service are emptied based on their priority tags Only when these classes are empty are packets of lower priority transmitted For weighted round robin queuing the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight For a configuration of 8 CoS queues Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 66 with their respective weight value 8 the packets are sent in the following 1 D1 GI HI A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A3 C3 D3 F3 A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 A5 B5 C5 D5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 A8 AL DI EL FI Gl HI For weighted round robin queuing if each CoS queue has the same weight value then each CoS queue has an equal opportunity to send packets just like round robin queuing For weighted round robin queuing if the weight for a CoS is set to 0 then it will continue processing the packets from this CoS until there are no more packets for this CoS The other CoS queues that have been given a nonzero value and depending upon the weight will follow a common weighted round robin scheme Remember that the AT 9724TS has 7 configurable priority queues and seven Classes of Service for each port on the Switch A Caution Switch contains eight classes of service for eac
132. ast Source field is invalid The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 173 Authenticator Session Statistics This table contains the session statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Session Statistics click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Session Statistics orn Corpo Stt ef Une Figure 9 25 Authenticator Session Statistics window The user can specify a switch in a switch stack using that switch s Unit ID by using the pull down menu in the top left hand corner The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 5 and 60s where 5 The following fields can be viewed stands for seconds The default value is one second Parameter Description Port The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides Octets Rx The number of octets received in user data frames on this port during the session Octets Tx The number of octets transmitted in user data frames on this port during the session Frames Rx The number of user data frames received on this port during the session
133. ates An essential difference between the three protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way this transition relates to the role of the port forwarding or not forwarding in the topology MSTP and RSTP combine the transition states disabled blocking and listening used in 802 14 and creates a single state Discarding In either case ports do not forward packets In the STP port transition states disabled blocking or listening or in the RSTP MSTP port state discarding there is no functional difference the port is not active in the network topology Table 6 1 below compares how the three protocols differ regarding the port state transition All three protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way Every segment will have a single path to the root bridge All bridges listen for BPDU packets However BPDU packets are sent more frequently with every Hello packet BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received Therefore each link between bridges is sensitive to the status of the link Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed links and thus faster topology adjustment A draw back of 802 14 is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges 802 14 MSTP 802 1w RSTP 802 1 STP Forwarding Learning Discarding Discarding Disabled No No Discarding Discarding Blocking No No Discarding Discarding Listening No No Learning Learning Learning No Yes Forwarding Forwarding For
134. ault setting is 128 The settings of each port may be viewed in the Traffic Control Table in the same window Click Apply to implement changes made 6 16 Port Security A given port s or a range of ports dynamic MAC address learning be locked such that the current source MAC addresses entered into the MAC address forwarding table can not be changed once the port lock is enabled The port can be locked by using the Admin State pull down menu to Enabled and clicking Apply Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers with source MAC addresses unknown to the Switch prior to locking the port or ports from connecting to the Switch s locked ports and gaining access to the network Part Security Settings Max Ad Unat From Io Admin State Mode 64 Pot D E Apply Security Table Unit 1 Admin State Max Learning Addr Lock Address Mode Disabled I Delete OnR eset Disabled I DeleteOnReset Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset D Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset d Disabled I Delete OnB eset Disabled I Delete OnEeset Disabled DeleteOnKeset Diable 1 DeleteOnReset Disabled 1 DeleteOnReeet 0 Disabled I DeleteOnReset 11 Disabled I DeleteOnKeset 2 Disabled D DeleteOnReset 3 Disabled I Delete OnReret 4 Disabled I Delete OnR eet 15 Disabled I DeleteOnReset 16 Drzabled L DeleteOnKeset 2 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReset 8 Disabled I Delete OnR ecet 19 Disabled I D
135. bibi ace er Pap aped mi ut ture AE 20 SNMP Based Management Areses sed eau eius aer ON EE A edd Qe mar ENS MIO EE 20 Command Line Console Interface Through The Serial 20 Connecting the Corisole Por amp RS 232 ez e estet pe e S del etna beet me subtus Cd Sek cine ERR ES uar AS d 20 First Time Connecting to The Switch o teret mre etes br ri up Er a EREDE Rx Ete edlen le pe fd 21 Password Protection C EUER ETERNI EET DX dea E pe er d VY dant Rep Ce d ta E pede sqb N da v Gee 22 Kl wl 22 ROS pue EAD 23 IEN 23 IP Address Assignment e EEN n e dub dete UN ah EE EE EE EE c sum tert Te Af 23 Connecting Devices Switch SIDE ISDEM IPAE SAL ISI EM LII eI d EN LE EUN Ae re eu 24 Introduction to Web based Switch Configurations 252 us reg rper eher EEN Pe ru s n Rr ER NEE alae ete e ea 25 e ra EOS x dd bdo Ro dT Vn c e P S LoT S d aS do Va x pd 25 Login to Web Managen kd nne d eec ip Erie e EE EE RP gi lade dea bog
136. bone A virtual path is a logical path between two border routers that have a common area with one border router connected to the backbone Partitioning the Backbone OSPF also allows virtual links to be configured to connect the parts of the backbone that are discontinuous This is the equivalent to linking different area Os together using a logical path between each area O Virtual links can also be added for redundancy to protect against a router failure A virtual link is configured between two border routers that both have a connection to their respective area Os Neighbors Routers that are connected to the same area or segment become neighbors in that area Neighbors are elected via the Hello protocol IP multicast is used to send out Hello packets to other routers on the segment Routers become neighbors when they see themselves listed in a Hello packet sent by another router on the same segment In this way two way communication is guaranteed to be possible between any two neighbor routers Any two routers must meet the following conditions before the become neighbors Area ID Two routers having a common segment their interfaces have to belong to the same area that segment Of course the interfaces should belong to the same subnet and have the same subnet mask Authentication OSPF allows for the configuration of a password for specific area Two routers the same segment and belonging to the same area must also have th
137. byte octet boundary The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64 bytes and have a good CRC Undersize packets usually indicate collision fragments a normal network occurrence Counts packets received that were longer than 1518 octets or if a VLAN frame is 1522 octets and less than the MAX PKT LEN Internally MAX PKT LEN is equal to 1522 The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an invalid CRC These are normally the result of collisions The number of packets with lengths more than the MAX PKT LEN bytes Internally MAX PKT LEN is equal to 1522 The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot Check whether or not to display Crc Error Under Size Over Size Fragment Jabber and Drop errors Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table Transmitted TX Click the Transmitted TX link in the Error folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of error packets received on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Swit
138. c The more routers between a source and a destination the greater the RIP distance or hop count There a few rules to the routing table update process that help to improve performance and stability router will not replace a route with a newly learned one if the new route has the same hop count sometimes referred to as cost So learned routes are retained until a new route with a lower hop count is learned When learned routes are entered into the routing table a timer is started This timer is restarted every time this route is advertised If the route is not advertised for a period of time usually 180 seconds the route is removed from the routing table RIP does not have an explicit method to detect routing loops Many RIP implementations include an authorization mechanism a password to prevent a router from learning erroneous routes from unauthorized routers Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 100 To maximize stability the hop count RIP uses to measure distance must have a low maximum value Infinity that is the network is unreachable is defined as 16 hops In other words if a network is more than 16 routers from the source the local router will consider the network unreachable RIP can also be slow to converge to remove inconsistent unreachable or looped routes from the routing table because RIP messages propagate relatively slowly through a network Slow conver
139. ch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 163 1 jJ Por5 H Apply Geer View Table Tree fis sl Record Humpe 200 EN amp howfHide I9 ExDefer M Laetoli M M Figure 9 I Tx Error Analysis window line graph To view the Transmitted Error Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table View Line Chart Unit 1 Port Port 5 Time Imerva 5 an ExDefer LateColl Figure 9 12 Tx Error Analysis window table The following fields may be set or viewed Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 164 Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between Is and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 ExDefer Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface was delayed because the medium was busy LateColl Counts the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet ExColl Excessive Collisions The number of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions SingColl Single Collision Frames The numbe
140. ch will display the following Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 127 VRRP Interface Entry Display Interface Name Darren Authentication type No Authentication VRID Virtual IP Address Tp DE Ha Virtual MAC Address Virtual Router State 00 00 5 00 01 02 Admin State Priority Master IP Address Critical IP Address Checking Critical IP Advertisement Interval Preempt Mode Virtual Router Up Time 0 Show All VRRP Interface Entries Parameter Figure 6 129 VRRP Interface Entry Display window This window displays the following information Description Interface Name Authentication type VRID Virtual IP Address Virtual MAC Address Virtual Router State Admin State Priority Master IP Address Critical IP Address Checking Critical IP Advertisement Interval Preempt Mode Virtual Router Up Time An IP interface name that has been enabled for VRRP This entry must have been previously set in the IP Interface Settings table Displays the type of authentication used to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router Possible authentication types include No authentication No authentication has been selected to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router Simple Text Password A Simple password has been selected to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router for authentication IP Authentication Header An MD5 messa
141. change Start Routers establish the initial sequence number that is going to used in the information exchange packets The sequence number insures that routers always get the most recent information One router will become the primary and the other will become secondary The primary router will poll the secondary for information Exchange Routers will describe their entire link state database by sending database description packets Loading The routers are finalizing the information exchange Routers have link state request list and a link state retransmission list Any information that looks incomplete or outdated will be put on the request list Any update that is sent will put on the retransmission list until it gets acknowledged Full The adjacency is now complete The neighboring routers are fully adjacent Adjacent routers will have the same link state database Adjacencies on Point to Point Interfaces OSPF Routers that are linked using point to point interfaces such as serial links will always form adjacencies The concepts of DR and BDR are unnecessary OSPF Packet Formats All OSPF packet types begin with a standard 24 byte header and there are five packet types The header is described first and each packet type is described in a subsequent section OSPF packets except for Hello packets forward link state advertisements Link State Update packets for example flood advertisements throughout the OSPF rout
142. ck Apply to let the changes take effect Note You cannot mirror a fast port onto a slower port For example if you try to mirror the traffic from a 100Mbps port onto a IOMbps port this can cause throughput problems The port you are copying frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to which you are sending the copies Also the target port for the mirroring cannot be a member of a trunk group Please note a target port and a source port cannot be the same port 6 7 Link Aggregation Understanding Port Trunk Groups Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data pipeline The AT 9724TS supports up to 32 port trunk groups with 2 to 8 ports in each group A potential bit rate of 8000Mbps can be achieved 10 100 1000Mbps Backbone Switch MIR liec Telesyn a n Port Trunk Group 972415 e OC OOOO KG 2 LILI 100Mbps 100Mbps 100Mbps EX BX 10 100Mbps Hub Pd e BX 11
143. ck its hyperlinked Group Name which will then display the following window Add a Server Host to Server Group xtacacs Server Group xtacacs IP Address Protocol Delete Show Server Group Entries Figure 7 8 Add a Server Host to Server Group XTACACS window To add an Authentication Server Host to the list enter its IP address in the IP Address field choose the protocol associated with the IP address of the Authentication Server Host and click ADD to Group to add this Authentication Server Host to the group To add a server group other than the ones listed click the add button revealing the following window to configure Authentication Server Group Table Add Settings Group Name Apply Show Server Group Table Entnes Figure 7 9 Authentication Server Group Table Add Settings window Enter a group name of up to 15 characters into the Group Name field and click Apply The entry should appear in the Authentication Server Group Settings window as shown in Figure 7 7 trinity zi Note Theuser must configure Authentication Server Hosts using the Authentication Server Hosts window before adding hosts to the list Authentication Server Hosts must be configured for their specific protocol on a remote centralized server before this function can work properly a Note The built in server groups can only have server hosts running the same TACACS or RADIUS daemon TACACS XTACACS TACACS protoco
144. click Add Modify Parameter Description VLAN ID VID MAC Address Unit Port The VLAN ID number of the VLAN on which the above Unicast MAC address resides The MAC address to which packets will be statically forwarded This must be a unicast MAC address Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified Allows the selection of the port number on which the MAC address entered above resides Click Apply to implement the changes made To delete an entry in the Static Unicast Forwarding Table click the corresponding X under the Delete heading Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 52 Static Multicast Forwarding The following figure and table describe how to set up Multicast Forwarding on the Switch Open the Forwarding Filtering folder and click on the Multicast Forwarding link to see the entry screen below Static Multicast Forwarding Settings Add new Multicast Forwarding Settings Add Current Multicast Forwarding Entries VLAN ID MAC Address Type Figure 6 35 Static Multicast Forwarding Settings and Current Multicast Forwarding Entries The Static Multicast Forwarding Settings page displays all of the entries made into the Switch s static multicast forwarding table Click the Add button to open the Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table as shown below Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table Multicast MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 D
145. cts how the Switch will be assigned an IP address on the next reboot The IP Address Settings options are Parameter Description BOOTP The Switch will send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up The BOOTP protocol allows addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a central BOOTP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a BOOTP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings DHCP The Switch will send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered up The DHCP protocol allows addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a DHCP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings Manual Allows the entry of IP address Subnet Mask and a Default Gateway for the Switch These fields should be of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a number represented in decimal form between 0 and 255 This address should be a unique address on the network assigned for use by the network administrator Subnet Mask A Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on Should be of the form XXX XXX XXX XXX where each XXX is a number represented in decimal between 0 and 255 The value should be 255 0 0 0 for a Class A network 255 255 0 0 for a Class B network and 255 255 255 0 for a
146. d Encryption Algorithm 3DES CBC Blow fish CBC AES128 CBC Enabled 8192 Enabled sl AES256 CBC ARC4 Cast 28 CBC Twofish123 Twofish192 Twofish256 Data Integrity Algorithm HMAC SHAI Enabled sl HMAC MD5 Enabled si Public Key Algorithm HMAC RSA nabled HMAC DSA rabled j Figure 7 24 SSH Algorithms window Description Authentication Mode Configuration Password Public Key Host based Encryption Algorithm This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch This field is Enabled by default This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a publickey configuration set on a SSH server for authentication This field is Enabled by default This field may be enabled or disabled to choose if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed This field is Enabled by default 3DES CBC Blow fish CBC AES128 CBC AES192 CBC AES256 CBC ARC4 Cast128 CBC Twofish 128 Twofish 192 Twofish256 Use the pull down to enable or disable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Use the pull dow
147. d by the router Hello Interval The number of seconds between this router s Hello packets Router Priority This router s Router Priority The Router Priority is used in the election of the DR and If this field is set to 0 the router is ineligible become the DR or the Router Dead Interval The number of seconds that must pass before declaring a silent router as down Designated Router The identity of the DR for this network in the view of the advertising router The DR is identified here by its IP interface address on the network Backup Designated Router The identity of the Backup Designated Router BDR for this network The BDR is identified here by its IP interface address on the network This field is set to 0 0 0 0 if there is no BDR Neighbor The Router IDs of each router from whom valid Hello packets have been seen within the Router Dead Interval on the network Database Description Packet Database Description packets are OSPF packet type 2 These packets are exchanged when an adjacency is being initialized They describe the contents of the topological database Multiple packets may be used to describe the database For this purpose a poll response procedure is used One of the routers is designated to be master the other a slave The master seconds Database Description packets polls that are acknowledged by Database Description packets sent by the slave responses The responses are linked to the polls via the packe
148. d click the DWMR Configuration link This will give the user access to the following screen DVMRP Global Settings DVMRP State iB Figure 6 132 DVMRP Global Settings window Use the pull down menu choose Enabled and click Apply to implement the DVMRP function on the Switch DVMRP Interface Settings To view the DVMRP Interface Table open the IP Multicasting folder under Configuration and click DVMRP Interface Settings This menu allows the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP to be configured for each IP interface defined on the Switch Each IP interface configured on the Switch is displayed in the below DVMRP Interface Configuration dialog box To configure DVMRP for a particular interface click the corresponding hyperlink for that IP interface This will open the DVMRP Interface Configuration window DVMRP Interface Settings Interface Neighbor Name Timeout System 10 90 90 90 35 10 1 Disabled IP Address Probe Metric State Figure 6 133 DVMRP Interface Settings window DVMRP Interface Settings interface Name System IP Address 10 90 90 90 Timeout Interval 1 65535 sec Probe Interval 1 65535 sec Metric 1 31 Apply Show All OVMRP Interface Entries Figure 6 134 DVMRP Interface Settings Edit window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 130 The following fields can be set Parameter Description Interface Name
149. ddress mask for the source MAC address Destination MAC Mask Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1 priority value of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header The user may set the Access Profile Table on a per port basis by entering a port number in this field The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that switch separated by a colon Then the highest switch number and the highest port number of the range also separated by a colon are specified The beginning and end of the port list range are separated a dash For example 1 3 specifies switch number port 3 2 4 specifies switch number 2 port 4 1 3 2 4 specifies all of the ports between switch port 3 and switch 2 port 4 in numerical order Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch The page shown below is the IP Access Profile Configuration page Access Profile Configuration Profile I Type VLAN Dd 8 Sourre IP Mask Destination IP Mask Decp Protocol code type sre port mask det port mark flag tit FT ug stc port mask dst port mask geotocol user mask m T UDP Proli
150. define the maximum number of router hops BOOTP messages can be forwarded across The default hop count is 4 BOOTP Relay Time Threshold 0 65535 Allows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds and defines the maximum time limit for routing a BOOTP DHCP packet If a value of 0 is entered the Switch will not process the value in the seconds field of the BOOTP or DHCP packet If a non zero value is entered the Switch will use that value along with the hop count to determine whether to forward a given BOOTP or DHCP packet Click Apply to implement changes made DHCP BootP Relay Settings The DHCP BootP Relay settings allow the user to set up a server by IP address for relaying DHCP BootP information to the Switch The user may enter previously configured IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the DHCP BootP server using the following window Properly configured settings will be displayed in the BootP Relay Table at the bottom of the following window once the user clicks the Add button The user may add up to four Server IPs per IP interface the Switch Entries may be deleted by clicking it s corresponding X DHCP Bootp Relay Settings Interface Bootp Relay Table Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 4 Figure 6 123 DHCP BootP Relay Settings and BootP Relay Table window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description Interface The IP interface on the Switch that wi
151. destinations with the individual router as the root The IP routing table will then be made up of the destination address associated cost and the address of the next hop to reach each destination Once the link state databases are updated Shortest Path Trees calculated and the IP routing tables written if there are no subsequent changes in the OSPF network such as a network link going down there is very little OSPF traffic Shortest Path Algorithm The Shortest Path to a destination is calculated using the Dijkstra algorithm Each router is places at the root of a tree and then calculates the shortest path to each destination based on the cumulative cost to reach that destination over multiple possible routes Each router will then have its own Shortest Path Tree from the perspective of its location in the network area even though every router in the area will have and use the exact same link state database The following sections describe the information used to build the Shortest Path Tree OSPF Cost Each OSPF interface has an associated cost also called metric that is representative of the overhead required to send packets over that interface This cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface higher bandwidth interface has a lower cost There is then a higher cost and longer time delays in sending packets over a 56 Kbps dial up connection than over a OMbps Ethernet connection formula used
152. disable the web based switch management To log on to the Switch again the header of the URL must begin with https Entering anything else into the address field of the web browser will result in an error and no authentication will be granted Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 144 7 5 Secure Shell SSH SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services over an insecure network It allows a secure login to remote host computers a safe method of executing commands on a remote end node and will provide secure encrypted and authenticated communication between two non trusted hosts SSH with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today s networking environment It is a powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH client and the Switch the SSH server are as follows l Create a user account with admin level access using the User Accounts window in the Security Management folder This is identical to creating any other admin level User Account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to logon to the Switch once a secure communication path has been established using the SSH protocol 2 Configure the User Account to use a specified a
153. ds let you secure access to the Switch using the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS protocols When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege he or she is prompted for a password If TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch it will contact a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify the user If the user is verified he or she is granted access to the Switch There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol each a separate entity The Switch s software supports the following versions of TACACS TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Provides password checking and authentication and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission Extended TACACS XTACACS An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus Provides detailed access control for authentication for network devices TACACS is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers The TACACS protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS daemon using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery
154. e 144 Secure Shell SSH Ee ve t E ENRRICUNRU ESQ RENS E Ud die le 145 SSH Configurations tace eibi der vom eene e odor SU Dade weeded Dies usar tud en Ru GR A La cU Bed OM GB Ria tur ob 145 SSH AlIgorithrm e Deje recedet ius teo iones qct erret urit odo EEN 145 SSH User Authentication ose sepe beg ect ere ee rne e tue deck eue esee eM eroe Oe ge NV eee ttu eedem e tare 147 SNMP Managers nte DU SKIN Se SP Ue idet ed E RR OU dA ES A ane ANE PRSE Oe iD EORNM MS 149 SNMP Settings emitir needs REI EDI Eres te emet mese emm emet Mule 149 SNMP User EE 150 SNMP View Tablet Ae e kee ee e c Ed AE EE 151 SINMP Gro p Table 2 75 302 soot eet pO EE 152 SNMP Comrmunity Table Configuration i remi eR pP PUR IM EE Ee e S 153 SNMP Host EE 154 SNMP Engine D 155 Monitoring ee Eege ge Kg eg 156 EE 156 CPU Utilization 5 em LL SE e E Seach NUR M 156 Packets oon wha ertet ee eed EE er Ae AE e eO Ee 157 R ceived RX x
155. e 8 None 5 None 10 None 11 None 12 None 13 None 14 None 15 None 16 None 17 None 18 None 19 None 20 None 2i None 22 None 23 None 24 None Figure 6 78 802 1 Capability Settings and Table window To set up the Switch s 802 Ix port based authentication select the switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select which ports to be configured in the From and To fields Next enable the ports by selecting Authenticator from the drop down menu under Capability Click Apply to let your change take effect Configure the following 802 x capability settings Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified From and To Ports being configured for 802 1x settings Capability Two role choices can be selected Authenticator user must pass the authentication process to gain access to the network None The port is not controlled by the 802 1 functions Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 88 Initializing Ports for Port Based 802 1 Existing 802 1 port settings are displayed and can be configured using the window below Note Ensure Port Based 802 1 is enabled under Configuration gt Advanced Settings Click Port Access Entity gt System Control gt Initialize Port s to open the following window Unit Initialize Port From initialize Port Table Lin
156. e Configuration menu Switch Information Device Type AT 9724TS Stackable Ethernet Switch Boot PROM Version Build 1 00 B04 Firmware Version Build 0 01 Hardware Version 3A1 Device SIN 00 04 88 77 9 00 System Location System Contact Apol Figure 6 Switch Information Basic Settings window The Switch Information window shows the Switch s MAC Address assigned by the factory and unchangeable the Boot PROM Firmware Version and Hardware Version This information is helpful to keep track of PROM and firmware updates and to obtain the Switch s MAC address for entry into another network device s address table if necessary The user may also enter a System Name System Location and System Contact to aid in defining the Switch to the user s preference Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 28 6 2 IP Address The IP Address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet If the Switch IP address has not yet been changed read the introduction of the AT 9724TS Command Line Interface Reference Manual or return to Chapter 4 of this manual for more information To change IP settings using the web manager you must access the IP Address menu located in the Configuration folder To configure the Switch s IP address Open the Configuration folder and click the IP Address menu link The web manager will display the Switch s curr
157. e Tabie Erme The following parameters can be set for IP Parameter Figure 6 62 Access Profile Configuration IP Description Profile ID 1 8 Type VLAN Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackal Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 8 Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IP to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding ble Gigabit Ethernet Switch 77 Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address Destination IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header You must then specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select ICMP to
158. e VLAN the IP interface belongs to Secondary Use the pull down menu to set the IP interface as True or False True will set the interface as secondary and False will denote the interface as the primary interface of the VLAN entered above Secondary interfaces can only be configured if a primary interface is first configured State This field may be altered between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu This entry determines whether the interface will be active or not Link Status This read only field states the current status of the IP Interface on the Switch Link Up denotes that the IP interface is up and running on the Switch Link Down will denote that the IP interface is not currently set and or enabled on the Switch Click Apply to implement changes made MDS Key Table Configuration The MDS Key Table Configuration menu allows the entry of a sixteen character Message Digest version 5 MD5 key which can be used to authenticate every packet exchanged between OSPF routers It is used as a security mechanism to limit the exchange of network topology information to the OSPF routing domain MD5 Keys created here can be used in the OSPF Interface Configuration menu below To configure an MDS Key click the MD5 Key link to open the following dialog box MDS Key Setting Key ID 1 255 Key Add Modify MD5 Key Table Key ID Key Delete Figure 6 88 MD5 Key Setting and Table window Allied Telesyn AT 9
159. e configured on a per area basis Routers in the same area that participate in the routing domain must be configured with the same key This method is possibly vulnerable to passive attacks where a link analyzer is used to obtain the password Backbone and Area 0 OSPF limits the number of link state updates required between routers by defining areas within which a given router operates When more than one area is configured one area is designated as area 0 also called the backbone The backbone is at the center of all other areas all areas of the network have a physical or virtual connection to the backbone through a router OSPF allows routing information to be distributed by forwarding it into area 0 from which the information can be forwarded to all other areas and all other routers on the network In situations where an area is required but is not possible to provide a physical connection to the backbone a virtual link can be configured Virtual Links Virtual links accomplish two purposes Linking an area that does not have a physical connection to the backbone Patching the backbone in case there is discontinuity area 0 Areas Not Physically Connected to Area 0 All areas of an OSPF network should have a physical connection to the backbone but is some cases it is not possible to physically connect a remote area to the backbone In these cases a virtual link is configured to connect the remote area to the back
160. e form of an IP address that uniquely identifies the remote area s Area Border Router Specify the interval between the transmission of OSPF Hello packets in seconds Enter a value between and 65535 seconds The Hello Interval Dead Interval Authorization Type and Authorization Key should have identical settings for all routers on the same network Specify the length of time between receiving Hello packets from a neighbor router before the selected area declares that router down Again all routers on the network should use the same setting If using authorization for OSPF routers select the type being used MD5 key authorization must be set up in the MD5 Key Settings menu Enter a case sensitive password for simple authorization or enter the MD5 key you set in the MD5 Key settings menu The number of seconds required to transmit a link state update over this virtual link Transit delay takes into account transmission and propagation delays This field is fixed at second The number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this virtual link This field is fixed at 5 seconds Click Apply to implement changes made zi Note For OSPF to function properly some settings should be identical on all participating OSPF devices These settings include the Hello Interval and Dead Interval For networks using authorization for OSPF devices the Authorization Type and
161. e queue Generally however it is recommended that the highest priority queue Queue be reserved for data packets with a priority value of 7 Packets that have not been given any priority value are placed in Queue 0 and thus given the lowest priority for delivery A weighted round robin system is employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues are emptied of packets The ratio used for clearing the queues is 4 1 This means that the highest priority queue Queue will clear 4 packets for every packet cleared from Queue 0 Remember the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports and all devices connected to the Switch will be affected This priority queuing system will be especially beneficial if your network employs switches with the capability of assigning priority tags VLAN Description A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLANs also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLANS can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains AVLAN is a collection of end nodes gr
162. e same OSPF password before they can become neighbors Hello and Dead Intervals The Hello interval specifies the length of time in seconds between the hello packets that a router sends an OSPF interface The dead interval is the number of seconds that a router s Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF router down OSPF routers exchange Hello packets on each segment in order to acknowledge each other s existence on a segment and to elect a Designated Router on multi access segments OSPF requires these intervals to be exactly the same between any two neighbors If any of these intervals are different these routers will not become neighbors on a particular segment Stub Area Flag Any two routers also have to the same stub area flag in their Hello packets in order to become neighbors Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 106 Adjacencies Adjacent routers go beyond the simple Hello exchange and participate in the link state database exchange process OSPF elects one router as the Designated Router DR and a second router as the Backup Designated Router BDR on each multi access segment the is a backup in case of a DR failure All other routers on the segment will then contact the DR for link state database updates and exchanges This limits the bandwidth required for link state database updates Designated Router Election The election of the
163. e through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge The user may choose time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds Any port on the Switch spends this time in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state This field shows the time in seconds since the last spanning tree topology change This field displays the number of times that the spanning tree topology has changed since the original initial boot up of the Switch Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 50 STP Port Settings STP can be set up on a port per port basis To view the following window click Configuration gt Spanning Tree gt STP Port Settings STP Port Settings Seal NT ji jiPot li ves Tree Enebled sl Unit From To STP Port Settings Table Unit 1 PortExternal Cost Hello Time 1 AUTO 200
164. ecify that SNMP version 2 will be used V3 NoAuth NoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with a NoAuth NoPriv security level V3 Auth NoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth NoPriv security level V3 Auth Priv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth Priv security level Community String or SNMP V3 User Name Type in the community string or SNMP V3 user name as appropriate To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP Host Table click the Show All SNMP Host Table Entries link SNMP Engine ID The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMP V3 implementations This is an alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch To display the Switch s SNMP Engine ID open the SNMP Manager folder and click on the SNMP Engine ID link This will open the SNMP Engine ID Configuration window as shown below SNMP Engine ID Configuration Engine ID 8000000030000005233 3 Figure 8 1 I SNMP Engine ID Configuration window To change the Engine ID type the new Engine ID in the space provided and click che Apply button Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch ER Chapter 9 Monitoring 9 1 Port Utilization The Port Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port To view the port utilization open the Monitoring folder and then the Port
165. ed and so on The built in Authentication Server Groups can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol For example the TACACS Authentication Server Groups can only have TACACS Authentication Server Hosts The administrator for the Switch may set up 6 different authentication techniques per user defined method list XTACACS TACACS RADIUS local none for authentication These techniques will be listed in an order preferable and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch and may contain up to eight authentication techniques When a user attempts to access the Switch the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication If the first technique goes through its Authentication Server Hosts and no authentication is returned the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication until the authentication has been verified or denied or the list is exhausted Please note that users granted access to the Switch will be granted normal user privileges on the Switch To gain access to administrator level privileges the user must access the Enable Admin window and then enter a password which was previously configured by the administrator of the Switch oo Note 5 XTACACS and TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same using the same protocol For example if the Switch is se
166. ed Settings window contains the main settings for all major functions for the Switch view the Advanced Settings window click its link in the Configuration folder This will enable the following window to be viewed and configured Switch Information Advanced Settings Serial Port Auto Logout Serial Port Baud Hate IMAC Address Aging Time 10 1000000 IGMP Snooping Multie ast router Only GVRP Status Telnet Status Telnet TCP Port Number 1 65535 Web Status Enabled TCP 80 RMON Status Disabled gt Link Aggregation Algorithm PSowce Switch 802 1x Disabled gt Auth Protocol Radius Eep 2 HOL Prevention Jumbo Frame Di sabled Syslog state Disabled sl Apply Figure 6 3 Switch Information Advanced Settings Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 30 Parameter Serial Port Auto Logout Time Serial Port Baud Rate MAC Address Aging Time 10 1000000 IGMP Snooping Multicast router Only GVRP Status Telnet Status Telnet TCP Port Number 1 65535 Web Status RMON Status Link Aggregation Algorithm Switch 802 1x Auth Protocol HOL Prevention Jumbo Frame Syslog State Description Select the logout time used for the console interface This automatically logs the user out after an idle period of time as defined Choose from the following options 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes or Never The default setting
167. ed before the Leave Timer expires the multicast forwarding entry for that host is deleted Querier State Choose Enabled to enable transmitting IGMP Query packets or Disabled to disable The default is Disabled Querier Router Behavior This read only field describes the behavior of the router for sending query packets Querier will denote that the router is sending out IGMP query packets Non Querier will denote that the router is not sending out IGMP query packets This field will only read Querier when the Querier State and the State fields have been Enabled State Select Enabled to implement IGMP Snooping This field is Disabled by default Click Apply to implement the new settings Click the Show All IGMP Group Entries link to return to the Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries window Static Router Ports A static router port is a port that has a multicast router attached to it Generally this router would have a connection to a WAN or to the Internet Establishing a router port will allow multicast packets coming from the router to be propagated through the network as well as allowing multicast messages IGMP coming from the network to be propagated to the router A router port has the following behavior All IGMP Report packets will be forwarded to the router port IGMP queries from the router port will be flooded to all ports e UDP multicast packets will be forwarded to the router port Because routers do not send IGMP
168. efore define multiple routes to the Internet or other critical network connections Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Critical IP address entered above Specifies the type of authentication used The Auth Type must be consistent with all routers participating within the VRRP group The choices are None Selecting this parameter indicates that VRRP protocol exchanges will not be authenticated Simple Selecting this parameter will require the user to set a simple password in the Auth Data field for comparing VRRP message packets received by a router If the two passwords are not exactly the same the packet will be dropped IP Selecting this parameter will require the user to set a MD5 message digest for authentication in comparing VRRP messages received by the router If the two values are inconsistent the packet will be dropped This field is only valid if the user selects Simple or IP in the Auth Type field Simple will require the user to enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 8 characters to identify VRRP packets received by a router IP will require the user to enter a MD5 message digest for authentication in comparing VRRP messages received by the router This entry must be consistent with all routers participating in the same IP interface Click Apply to implement changes made To view the settings for a particular VRRP setting click the corresponding View in the VRRP Interface Table of the entry whi
169. eleteOnReset 0 Disabled I DeleteOnReset 1 Disabled I DeleteOnR eset 2 Disabled I Delete OnResrt 23 Disabled 1 DeleteOnReret d Disabled I DeleteOnEeset Figure 6 45 Port Security Settings and Port Security Table window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified From To A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Admin State This pull down menu allows you to enable or disable Port Security locked MAC address table for the selected ports Max Learning Addr 0 64 The number of MAC addresses that will be in the MAC address forwarding table for the selected switch and group of ports Mode This pull down menu allows you to select how the MAC address table locking will be implemented on the Switch for the selected group of ports The options are Permanent The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnTimeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnReset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset Click Apply to implement changes made Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 64 6 17 Port Lock Entries The Port Lock Entry Delete window is used to remove an entry from the port security entries learned by the Switch and entered into the forwarding databa
170. em Control gt Reauthenticate Port s to open the following window Reauthenticate Port s Address Figure 6 82 Reauthenticate Ports MAC based 802 1 To reauthenticate ports first choose the switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu then the range of ports in the From and To field Then the user must specify the MAC address to be reauthenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box To begin the reauthentication click Apply Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 91 RADIUS Server The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows you to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing protection against a sniffing active hacker The Web Manager offers three windows Click Port Access Entity gt RADIUS Server gt Authentic Radius Server to open the RADIUS Server Authentication Setting window shown below Authentic RADIUS Server Setting Succession RADIUS Server Authentic Port Accounting Port Key Confirm Key Status Apply Current RADIUS Server s Settings Table Auth UDP Acct UDP rt Port Pest Second Third Figure 6 83 Authentic RADIUS Server Setting and Current RADIUS Server Settings Table window This window displays the following information Parameter Description Succession Choose the desired RADIUS server to configure First Second or Third RADIUS Server
171. enance required make routers relatively impractical Today s switches are an ideal solution to most kinds of local area network congestion problems Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 10 1 2 Switch Description The AT 9724TS has 24 1000T Gigabit ports that may be used in uplinking various network devices to the Switch including PCs hubs and other switches to provide a gigabit Ethernet uplink in full duplex mode In addition the AT 9724TS is equipped with 4 SFP Small Form Factor Portable combo ports which are to be used with fibre optical transceiver cabling in order to uplink various other networking devices for a gigabit link that may span great distances These 4 SFP ports support full duplex transmissions have auto negotiation and can be used with AT MG8LX10 10001 AT MG8SX 10005 and AT MG8ZX 10007 transceivers These four ports are referred to as combo ports which means that both the SFP ports and the 1000 ports are numbered the same 21 24 and cannot be used simultaneously Attempting to use the ports simultaneously will cause a link down status for the 1000 ports SFP ports will always have priority over these 1000 ports Also included at the rear of the Switch are two 0 gigabit stacking ports used to stack up to twelve switches in a ring topology The AT 9724TS may be used as the master unit of a switch stack when utilizing these ports and in total may provide a stacking
172. ent IP settings in the IP configuration menu as seen below Switch IP Settings Get IP From Manuel gt 05313188 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 000 VLAN Name default Figure 6 2 1 Address Settings window To manually assign the Switch s IP address subnet mask and default gateway address l Select Manual from the Get IP From drop down menu 2 Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask 3 If you want to access the Switch from a different subnet from the one it is installed on enter the IP address of the Default Gateway If you will manage the Switch from the subnet on which it is installed you can leave the default address 0 0 0 0 in this field 4 If no VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you can use the default VLAN The default VLAN contains all of the Switch ports as members If VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you will need to enter the VLAN ID of the VLAN that contains the port connected to the management station that will access the Switch The Switch will allow management access from stations with the same VID listed here zi Note Switch s factory default IP address is 10 0 0 1 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 and a default gateway of 0 0 0 0 To use the BOOTP or DHCP protocols to assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask and default gateway address Use the Get IP From Manual pull down menu to choose from BOOTP or DHCP This sele
173. ent is Enabled by default If you choose to disable this by selecting Disabled you will lose the ability to configure the system through the web interface as soon as these settings are applied Remote monitoring RMON of the Switch is Enabled or Disabled here The algorithm that the Switch uses to balance the load across the ports that make up the port trunk group is defined by this definition Choose MAC Source MAC Destination MAC Src amp Dest IP Source IP Destination or IP Src amp Dest See the Link Aggregation section of this manual The Switch s 802 Ix function may be enabled by port or by MAC Address the default is Disabled This field must be enabled to view and configure certain windows for 802 1 More information regarding 802 its functions and implementation can be found later in this section under the Port Access Entity folder Port Based 802 1x specifies that ports configured for 802 Ix are initialized based on the port number only and are subject to any authorization parameters configured MAC based Authorization specifies that ports configured for 802 1x are initialized based on the port number and the MAC address of the computer being authorized and are then subject to any authorization parameters configured The user may use the pull down menu to choose between radius eap and radius pap for the 802 1 authentication protocol on the Switch The default setting is radius eap This field will enable or disable
174. enticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server server group Adding a previously configured server group will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch Local Enable Password This window will configure the locally enabled password for the Enable Admin command When a user chooses the local enable method to promote user level privileges to administrator privileges he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is locally set on the Switch To view the following window click Security Management gt Access Authentication Control gt Local Enable Password Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 141 Configure Local Enable Password Old Local Enable Password New Local Enable Password Confirm Local Enable Password Figure 7 18 Configure Local Enable Password window To set the Local Enable Password set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Old Local Enable Pass
175. ents are originated by Area Border routers A separate summary link advertisement is made for each destination known to the router that belongs to the Autonomous System AS yet is outside the area Type 3 link state advertisements are used when the destination is an IP network In this case the advertisement s Link State ID field is an IP network number When the destination is an AS boundary router a Type 4 advertisement is used and the Link State ID field is the AS boundary router s OSPF Router ID Other that the difference in the Link State ID field the format of Type 3 and 4 link state advertisements is identical Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Summary Link Advertisements Octets 2 3 Link State ID A Advertising Router Link State Sequence Number Link State Checksum Length Network Mask TOS Metric Figure 6 109 Summary Link Advertisements For stub area Type 3 summary link advertisements can also be used to describe a default route on a per area basis Default summary routes are used in stub area instead of flooding a complete set of external routes When describing a default summary route the advertisement s Link State ID is always set to the Default Destination 0 0 0 0 and the Network Mask is set to 0 0 0 0 Separate costs may be advertised for each IP Type of Service Note that the cost for TOS 0 must be included and is always listed first If the T bit
176. er Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between Is and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Utilization Check whether or not to display Utilization 9 3 Packets The Web Manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Six windows are offered Received RX Click the Received RX link in the Packets folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of packets received on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 157 Time interrail Record Number 200 ShowHide F Ores F Packets Figure 9 3 Rx Packets Analysis window line graph for Bytes and Packets To view the Received Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table Nues LaneChast Unit 1 Port bh oe Byes JI kl Al Unicast Broadcast Bytr5 Figure 9 4 Rx Packets Analysis window table for Bytes and Packets The following fields may be se
177. er ID for the remote router This IP address uniquely identifies the remote area s Area Border Router Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 181 Transit Area ID 0 0 0 0 Neighbor ID 0 0 0 0 OSPF Virtual Neighbor Table Transit Area Virtual Neighbor Virtual Neighbor Virtual Neighbor Address Option State There is no entry found Total Entries 0 Figure 9 36 OSPF Virtual Neighbor Table DVMRP Monitoring This menu allows the DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol to be monitored for each IP interface defined on the Switch This folder found in the Monitoring folder offers 3 screens for monitoring Browse DVMRP Routing Table Browse DVMRP Neighbor Address Table and Browse DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table Information on DVMRP and its features in relation to the AT 9724TS can be found in Chapter 6 under IP Multicast Routing Protocol Browse DVMRP Routing Table Multicast routing information is gathered and stored by DVMRP in the DVMRP Routing Table which may be found in the Monitoring folder under Browse DVMRP Monitoring contains one row for each port in a DVMRP mode Each routing entry contains information about the source and multicast group and incoming and outgoing interfaces You may define your search by entering a Source IP Address and its subnet mask into the fields at the top of the page Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 Source Mask 0000 Browse DVMRP Routin
178. ere snooped are displayed a Note configure IGMP snooping for the AT 9724TS go to the Configuration folder and select IGMP Snooping Configuration and other information concerning IGMP snooping may be found in Section 6 of this manual under IGMP 9 9 IGMP Snooping Forwarding This window will display the current IGMP snooping forwarding table entries currently configured on the Switch To view the following screen open the Monitoring folder and click the IGMP Snooping Forwarding link Total Entries 0 IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table VLAN Name Source IP Multicast Group 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port Member 3 4 5 6 78 9 12 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 712829 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Figure 9 20 IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 170 The user may search the IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table by VLAN Name using the top left hand corner Search The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the multicast group Source IP The Source IP address of the multicast group Multicast Group The IP address of the multicast group Port Map These are the ports where the IP multicast packets are being forwarded to 9 10 Browse Router Port This displays which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports A router po
179. ess xxx xxx xxx xxx z Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent RTI 9724TS 2 amp Port 10 100 1000 Stackable Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 1 85 Copyright C 2004 2807 Allied Telesyn Inc All rights reserved UserName manager PassWord RI 9726T8 amp Mconfig ipif System ipaddress 1 53 13 144 255 Command config ipif System ipaddress 10 53 13 144 8 Success RT 9724T5 AN Figure 4 4 Assigning the Switch an IP Address In the above example the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10 53 13 144 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management 4 10 Connecting Devices to the Switch After you assign IP addresses to the Switch you can connect devices to the Switch To connect a device to an SFP transceiver port D D D Use your cabling requirements to select an appropriate SFP transceiver type Insert the SFP transceiver sold separately into the SFP transceiver slot Use the appropriate network cabling
180. est path tree but is very important when Router B is constructing its shortest path tree Note also that directly connected networks are reached at a cost of 0 while other networks are reached at the cost calculated in the shortest path tree Router A can now build its routing table using the network addresses and costs calculated in building the above shortest path tree Areas and Border Routers OSPF link state updates are forwarded to other routers by flooding to all routers on the network OSPF uses the concept of areas to define where on the network routers that need to receive particular link state updates are located This helps ensure that routing updates are not flooded throughout the entire network and to reduce the amount of bandwidth consumed by updating the various router s routing tables Areas establish boundaries beyond which link state updates do not need to be flooded So the exchange of link state updates and the calculation of the shortest path tree are limited to the area that the router is connected to Routers that have connections to more than one area are called Border Routers BR The Border Routers have the responsibility of distributing necessary routing information and changes between areas Areas are specific to the router interface A router that has all of its interfaces the same area is called an Internal Router A router that has interfaces in multiple areas is called a Border Router Routers that act as gateway
181. et Forwarding Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the following three types of rules Ingress rules rules relevant to the classification of received frames belonging to a VLAN Forwarding rules between ports decides whether to filter or forward the packet Egress rules determines if the packet must be sent tagged or untagged Packet Packet Receive Transmit Ingress Ingress Egress Rules Filtering Rules Forwarding Process PVID to VID Filtering VLAN Table Database Tagged or Untagged Figure 6 37 IEEE 802 1 Q Packet Forwarding 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1 Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the EtherType field When a packet s EtherType field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 10 802 1 tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority used by 802 p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLANS can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is
182. et soe ne rete empta S Up idera He Gud eee pores S PCI aD ples tuti e d aa ta Ate Ee 34 Understanding Port Trunk Groups oie tote meurt Qe e Uds pe tree ree erga Ce DRAN S Sansa Sates wns donee esa WE tales we d PHOT Savers Sore 34 LACP PortS ttingz e bm let beg eiit n tig ect KEE EE 36 Notification EE EE DE A DUET AU a SEILER EOE 5 PATER ONU EP TOTAL ALONE ERGY pd ed 37 MAG Notification Global Settings Get eet rimum A Ua Reg ruere ries Mert e P E pr PHI pe PENA DIU UST PER REPE E E qe D 37 MAC Notification PortsSetting o ox enn ce EE sed Sod Og catt oS 38 IGMP aere de M E ENRIQUE ED NU E NE E nse FUTURE UN E UE ET theme pterea qae D ns 38 eil 40 Static Router POrtS tee Ee AANEREN E RERO MERI ARTE ELEN EE KC RH A E m e PATH OUR KP VE VERON PU 4l Spanning Tree pei UP Nodo Ate e A d decree stt qs soe aie ete ld er uestes d mda Dating ub ef ui 42 802 Is MSTB Zope wed e Re ERQn Red RD EE 42 802 Iw Rapid Spahining Tree sva esit esta nre ME RE PURSE SPUREN RS SPUREN LES LAD rud Deae OA ES AUD DE EA 43 STP Bridge Global Settings Zanen e pau petere pire M RR FESSA Mee a e EDU er ePi E RT bE CH hash eter eia 43 MST Configuration Tables lt lt te ro EE di c tea E EE t re
183. ets received on the Switch select port to view these statistics for first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Unit Port Apply ji Pon5 Apply Cleer View Tabh Fragment E Record Number 20 D F Underste Time imer 35 BhowfMde v CiErmor M M Fragment Jabber Figure 9 9 Rx Error Analysis window line graph To view the Received Error Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 162 Maes LineChart The following fields can be set Parameter Unit 1 Port PortS Time Interval hs Undersize OverSiz Fragment Jabber Drop Figure 9 10 Rx Error Analysis window table Description Time Interval Record Number Crc Error Under Size Over Size Fragment Jabber Drop Show Hide Clear View Table View Line Select the desired setting between Is and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a
184. ex mode or flow control depending on the specified mode Various areas of the graphic can be selected for performing management functions including port configuration 3 Presents switch information based on your selection and the entry of configuration data A Caution Any changes made to the Switch configuration during the current session must be saved in the Save Changes web menu explained below or use the command line interface CLI command save Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 26 Web Pages Configurations Contains screens concerning configurations for IP Address Switch Information Advanced Settings Port Configuration IGMP Spanning Tree Forwarding Filtering VLANs Port Bandwidth SNTP Settings Port Security QoS MAC Notification LACH Access Profile Table System Log Servers PAE Access Entity and Layer 3 IP Networking Security Management Contains screens concerning configurations for Security IP User Accounts Access Authentication Control TACACS Secure Sockets Layer SSL and Secure Shell SSH SNMP Manager Contains screens and windows concerning the implementation and upkeep of the SNMP Manager of the Switch Monitoring Contains screens concerning monitoring the Switch pertaining to Port Utilization CPU Utilization Packets Errors Size MAC Address IGMP Snooping Group IGMP Snooping Forwarding VLAN Status Router Port Port Access Control and Layer 3
185. f 255 is reserved for the router that owns the IP address associated with the virtual router and is therefore set automatically Advertisement Interval 1 255 Enter a time interval value in seconds for sending VRRP message packets This value must be consistent with all Preempt Mode Critical IP Address Checking Critical IP Auth Type Auth Data participating routers The default is second This entry will determine the behavior of backup routers within the VRRP group by controlling whether a higher priority backup router will preempt a lower priority Master router A True entry along with having the backup router s priority set higher than the masters priority will set the backup router as the Master router A False entry will disable the backup router from becoming the Master router This setting must be consistent with all routers participating within the same VRRP group The default setting is True Enter the IP address of the physical device that will provide the most direct route to the Internet or other critical network connections from this virtual router This must be a real IP address of a real device on the network If the connection from the virtual router to this IP address fails the virtual router will automatically disabled A new Master will be elected from the backup routers participating in the VRRP group Different critical IP addresses may be assigned to different routers participating in the VRRP group and can ther
186. f time between sending IGMP queries Sets the maximum amount of time allowed before sending an IGMP response report value between and 25 seconds can be entered with a default of 10 seconds A tuning variable to allow for subnetworks that are expected to lose a large number of packets A value between 2 and 255 can be entered with larger values being specified for subnetworks that are expected to lose larger numbers of packets Specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages including those sent in response to leave group messages A value between and 25 The default is second This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled and enables or disables IGMP for the IP interface The default is Disabled Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 129 DVMRP Interface Configuration The Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DWMRP is hop based method of building multicast delivery trees from multicast sources to all nodes of a network Because the delivery trees are pruned and shortest path DVMRP is relatively efficient Because multicast group membership information is forwarded by a distance vector algorithm propagation is slow DVMRP is optimized for high delay high latency relatively low bandwidth networks and can be considered as a best effort multicasting protocol DVMRP resembles the Routing Information Protocol RIP but is extended for mult
187. false parameter indicates that the port does not have edge port status Choosing the True parameter indicates a point to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have p2p status Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were true If the port cannot maintain this status for example if the port is forced to half duplex operation the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were False The default setting for this parameter is True This drop down menu allows you to enable or disable STP for the selected group of ports The default is Enabled Click Apply to implement changes made 6 13 Forwarding amp Filtering Unicast Forwarding Open the Forwarding amp Filtering folder in the Configuration menu and click on the Unicast Forwarding link This will open the Setup Static Unicast Forwarding Table as shown below Setup Static Unicast Forwarding Table VLAN ID MAC Address 09 00 00 00 00 00 Poti Add Mody Static Unicast Forwarding Table Mac Address VID VLAN Name Delete Figure 6 34 Setup Static Unicast Forwarding Table and Static Unicast Forwarding Table window To add or edit an entry define the following parameters and then
188. folder under Configuration and click PIM DM Interface Configuration This window allows the PIM DM to be configured for each IP interface defined on the Switch Each IP interface configured on the Switch is displayed the below PIM DM Interface Table dialog box To configure PIM DM for a particular interface click the corresponding hyperlink for that IP interface This will open the PIM DM Interface Configuration window PIM DM Interface Settings Interface Name System IP Address JoiniPrune State Interval 10 90 90 90 30 60 Disabled Figure 6 136 PIM DM Interface Settings window PIM DM Interface Settings Interface Name System IP Address 10 90 90 90 Hello interval 1 18724 sec 30 Join Prune Interval 1 18724 sec 60 State Disabled Apply Show All PIM DM Interface Entries The following fields can be set Parameter Figure 6 137 PIM DM Interface Settings window Modify Description Interface Name IP Address Hello Interval 1 18724 Join Prune Interval 1 18724 State Allows the entry of the name of the IP interface for which PIM DM is to be configured This must be a previously defined IP interface Displays the IP address for the IP interface named above This field allows an entry of between and 18724 seconds and determines the interval between sending Hello packets to other routers on the network The default is 30 seconds This field allows an entry of
189. formance especially during peak demand as bottlenecks can quickly develop if the QoS settings are not suitable In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click QoS Output Scheduling to view the screen shown below QoS Output Scheduling Configuration Max Packets Class 6 Figure 6 50 QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 68 You may assign the following values to the QoS classes to set the scheduling Parameter Description Max Packets Specifies the maximum number of packets the above specified hardware priority queue will be allowed to transmit before allowing the next lowest priority queue to transmit its packets A value between 0 and 15 can be specified Click Apply to implement changes made ar Note Entering a 0 for the Max Packets field in the QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window above will create a Combination Queue For more information on implementation of this feature see the next section Configuring the Combination Queue Configuring the Combination Queue Utilizing the QoS Output Scheduling Configuration window shown above the AT 9724TS can implement a combination queue for forwarding packets This combination queue allows for a combination of strict and weight fair weighted round robin WRR scheduling for emptying given classes of service To set the combination queue enter a 0 for the Max Packets entry of the cor
190. forwarding multicast packets when there are no longer hosts requesting that they continue Use the IGMP Snooping Group Entry Table to view IGMP Snooping status To modify settings click the Modify button for the VLAN Name entry you want to change Use the Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries window to view IGMP Snooping settings To modify settings click the Modify button for the VLAN ID you want to change Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries VLAN ID 1 default Disabled Disabled Modify 4094 Tnnity Disabled Disabled Modify VLAN Name State Querier State Modify Figure 6 17 Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries Clicking the Modify button will open the IGMP Snooping Settings menu shown below IGMP Snooping Settings Max Response Time 1 25 sec Robustness Value 1 255 Last Member Query interval 25 sec _ Host Timeout 1 16711450 sec Gen Router Timeout 1 16711450 sec Deo Leave Timer 1 16711450 sec Querier State Disabled D Querier Router Behavior Non Querier Apply Figure 6 18 IGMP Snooping Settings window The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN the user wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for Query Interval The Query
191. g Table Interface Source IP 2 In pstream S Address Source Mask Neighbor Metric Learned ERR Expire 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 10 53 13 144 Total Entries 1 Figure 9 37 DVMRP Routing Table Browse DVMRP Neighbor Address Table This table found in the Monitoring menu under DVMRP Monitor gt Browse DVMRP Neighbor Address Table contains information about DVMRP neighbors of the Switch To search this table enter either an Interface Name or Neighbor Address into the respective field and click the Find button DVMRP neighbors of that entry will appear in the DVMRP Neighbor Table below Interface Name Neighbor Address DVMRP Neighbor Table Interface Name Neighbor Address Generation ID Expire Time System 10 20 6 24 1070379305 System 10 20 6 26 141 34 System 10 53 10 8 1014658134 34 Total Entries 3 Figure 9 38 DVMRP Neighbor Table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch ER Browse DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table The DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table contains information regarding the next hop for forwarding multicast packets on outgoing interfaces Each entry in the DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table refers to the next hop of a specific source to a specific multicast group address This table is found in the Monitoring menu under DVMRP Monitoring with the heading Browse DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table To search this table enter either an Interface Name or So
192. ge digest algorithm has been selected to compare VRRP packets received by a virtual router for authentication Displays the virtual router ID set by the user This will uniquely identify the VRRP Interface on the network Interface on the network The IP address of the Virtual router configured on the Switch The MAC address of the device that holds the Virtual router Displays the current status of the virtual router Possible states include Initialize Master and Backup Displays the current state of the router Up will be displayed if the virtual router is enabled and Down if the virtual router is disabled Displays the priority of the virtual router higher priority will increase the probability that this router will become the Master router of the group A lower priority will increase the probability that this router will become the backup router The lower the number the higher the priority Displays the IP address of the Master router for the VRRP function Displays the critical IP address of the VRRP function This address will judge if a virtual router is qualified to be a master router Displays the status of the Critical IP address May be enabled or disabled Displays the time interval in seconds that VRRP messages are sent out to the network Displays the mode for determining the behavior of backup routers set on this VRRP interface True will denote that this will be the backup router if the routers priority is set higher t
193. gelige metaldele 4 UDSTYR TIL STIKKONTAKT stikkontakten ber installeres n r ved udstyret og skal vere let tilg ngelig 5 A ADVARSEL Ventilations bninger ma ikke blokeres og skal have fri adgang til den omgivende luft i rummet for afk ling 6 A BETJENINGSTEMPERATUR Dette apparat er konstrueret til en omgivende temperatur p maksimum 40 grader C 7 A ALLE LANDE Installation af produktet skal ske i overensstemmelse med lokal og national lov givning for elektriske installationer Eisen Dit product voldoet aan de volgende eisen GEVAAR VOOR BLIKSEMINSLAG GEVAAR NIET aan toestellen of KABELS WERKEN bij BLIKSEM WAARSCHUWING HET TOESTEL WORDT UITGESCHAKELD DOOR DE STROOMKABEL TE ONTKOPPELEN OM HET TOESTEL STROOMLOOS TE MAKEN de stroomkabel ontkoppelen ELEKTRISCHE TOESTELLEN VAN KLASSE I DIT TOESTEL MOET GEAARD WORDEN De stekker moet aangesloten zijn op een juist geaarde contactdoos Een onjuist geaarde contactdoos kan de metalen onderdelen waarmee de gebruiker eventueel in aanraking komt onder gevaarlijke spanning stellen TE SLUITEN APPARATUUR de contactdoos wordt in de nabijheid van de apparatu ur ge nstalleerd en is gemakkelijk te bereiken OPGELET De ventilatiegaten mogen niet worden gesperd en moeten de omgevingslucht onge hinderd toelaten voor afkoeling BEDRIJFSTEMPERATUUR De omgevingstemperatuur voor dit produkt mag niet meer bedra gen dan 40 graden Celsius e PEP ALLE LANDEN het toestel in
194. gence can be solved by using split horizon update where a router does not propagate information about a route back to the interface on which it was received This reduces the probability of forming transient routing loops Hold down can be used to force a router to ignore new route updates for a period of time usually 60 seconds after a new route update has been received This allows all routers on the network to receive the message A router can poison reverse a route by adding an infinite 16 hop count to a route s advertisement This is usually used in conjunction with triggered updates which force a router to send an immediate broadcast when an update of an unreachable network is received RIP Version 1 Message Format There are two types of RIP messages routing information messages and information requests Both types use the same format The Command field specifies an operation according the following table Command Meaning l Request for partial or full routing information Response containing network distance pairs from sender s routing table Turn on trace mode obsolete Turn off trace mode obsolete Reserved for Sun Microsystem s internal use vio N Update Request 10 Update Response Update Acknowledgement RIP Command Codes The field Version contains the protocol version number 1 in this case and is used by the receiver to verify which version of RIP the packet was sent RIP Message
195. guration and one for the Packet Content Mask You can switch between the three Access Profile Configuration pages by using the Type drop down menu The page shown below is the Ethernet Access Profile Configuration page Access Profile Configuration Profile ID 1 8 RI Type Ethernet VLAN a Source MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 Destination 100 00 00 00 0 00 802 1 Ethernet type Port Profile Table Entre Figure 6 el Access Profile Table Ethernet Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 76 The following parameters can be set for the Parameter Ethernet type Description Profile ID 1 8 Type VLAN Source MAC Destination MAC 802 Ip Ethernet type Port Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 8 Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IP to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding Source MAC Mask Enter a MAC a
196. h port the Switch One of these classes is reserved for internal use on the Switch and is therefore unconfigurable All references in the following section regarding classes of service will refer to only the seven classes of service that may be used and configured by the Switch s Administrator Bandwidth Control The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected port In the Configuration folder click Bandwidth Control to view the screen shown below ype nu nmi Kate JUL Dseues ft App TX Rate Mbit ser Figure 6 48 Bandwidth Settings and Port Bandwidth Table The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified From To A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Type This drop down menu allows you to select between RX receive TX transmit and Both This setting will determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving transmitting or both receiving and transmitting packets no_limit This drop down menu allows you to specify that the selected port will have no bandwidth limit Enabled disables the limit Rate This field allows you to enter the data rate in Mbit s that will be the limit for the selected port Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Et
197. han the master router False will disable the backup router from becoming the master router Displays the time in minutes since the virtual router has been initialized Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 128 IP Multicast Routing Protocol The functions supporting IP multicasting are added under the IP Multicast Routing Protocol folder from the Layer 3 IP Networking folder IGMP Snooping DVMRP and PIM DM can be enabled or disabled on the Switch without changing the individual protocol s configuration IGMP Interface Configuration The Internet Group Multicasting Protocol IGMP can be configured on the Switch on a per IP interface basis To view the IGMP Interface Table open the IP Multicast Routing Protocol folder under Configuration and click IGMP Interface Settings Each IP interface configured on the Switch is displayed the below IGMP Interface Table dialog box To configure IGMP for a particular interface click the corresponding hyperlink for that IP interface This will open another IGMP Interface Configuration window IGMP Interface Table Interface A de IP Address Version Query Response Robustness State Time 10 53 13 126 2 25 0 Disabled 2 25 0 2 Disabled IGMP Interface Configuration Interface Name IP Address Version Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 CES Vanable 1 255 Last Member Query Interval 1 25 Disabled Apply Show
198. he default setting is 3 Connection TimeOut 120 600 Allows the user to set the connection timeout The use may set a time between 20 and 600 seconds The default setting is 120 seconds Auth Fail 2 20 Allows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on to the SSH Server utilizing the SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts has been exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login The number of maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20 The default setting is 2 Session Rekeying This field is used to set the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions by using the pull down menu The available options are Never 10 min 30 min and 60 min The default setting is Never SSH Algorithm The SSH Algorithm window allows the configuration of the desired types of SSH algorithms used for authentication encryption There are three categories of algorithms listed and specific algorithms of each may be enabled or disabled by using their corresponding pull down menus All algorithms are enabled by default To open the following window click Security Management gt Secure Shell SSH gt SSH Algorithm Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 145 The following algorithms may be set Parameter Authentication Mode Configuration Password Publickey Host base
199. he entry desired to be deleted modify an Enable Method List click on its hyperlinked Method List Name To configure a Method List click the Add button Both actions will result in the same screen to configure Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 140 Enable Method List Edit Method List Name Jefeult Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 local enable Keyword Show All Authentication Enable List Entries Figure 7 16 Enable Method List Edit window Enable Method List Add Method List Name Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 enable D Show All Authentication Enable List Entries Figure 7 17 Enable Method List Add window To define an Enable Login Method List set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Method List Name Method 1 2 3 4 Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters The user may add one or a combination of up to four 4 of the following authentication methods to this method list local enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local enable password database on the Switch The local enable password must be set by the user in the next section entitled Local Enable Password none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be auth
200. he same way as the switch level spanning tree but the root bridge concept is replaced with a root port concept A root port is a port of the group that is elected based on port priority and port cost to be the connection to the network for the group Redundant links will be blocked just as redundant links are blocked on the switch level The STP on the switch level blocks redundant links between switches and similar network devices The port level STP will block redundant links within an STP Group It is advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to a VLAN group of ports The following fields can be set Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified From To A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port External Cost This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is 0 auto Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Hello Time Migration Edge P2P State 0 auto Setting 0 for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost OOMbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 value 1 200000000 Define a value between and 200000000 to determine the external
201. hernet Switch 67 Click Apply to set the bandwidth control for the selected ports Results of configured Bandwidth Settings will be displayed in the Port Bandwidth Table QoS Scheduling Mechanism This drop down menu allows you to select between a Weight Fair and a Strict mechanism for emptying the classes of service In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click QoS Scheduling Mechanism to view the screen shown below scheduling Mechanism Configuration Scheduling Mechanism Qos Scheduling Mechanism Table Class ID Mechanism Figure 6 49 Scheduling Mechanism Configuration and QoS Scheduling Mechanism Table The Scheduling Mechanism has the following parameters Parameter Description Strict The highest queue is the first to process traffic That is the highest queue will finish before other queues empty Weight fair Use the weighted round robin WRR algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority queues Click Apply to let your changes take effect Output Scheduling QoS can be customized by changing the output scheduling used for the classes of service in the Switch As with any changes to QoS implementation careful consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower classes of service is affected Changes in scheduling may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss or significant transmission delay If you choose to customize this setting it is important to monitor network per
202. icast delivery DVMRP builds a routing table to calculate shortest paths back to the source of a multicast message but defines a route cost similar to the hop count in RIP as a relative number that represents the real cost of using this route in the construction of a multicast delivery tree to be pruned once the delivery tree has been established When a sender initiates a multicast DVMRP initially assumes that all users on the network will want to receive the multicast message When an adjacent router receives the message it checks its unicast routing table to determine the interface that gives the shortest path lowest cost back to the source If the multicast was received over the shortest path then the adjacent router enters the information into its tables and forwards the message If the message is not received on the shortest path back to the source the message is dropped Route cost is a relative number that is used by DVMRP to calculate which branches of a multicast delivery tree should be pruned The cost is relative to other costs assigned to other DVMRP routes throughout the network The higher the route cost the lower the probability that the current route will be chosen to be an active branch of the multicast delivery tree not pruned if there is an alternative route DVMRP Global Setting To enable DVMRP globally on the Switch open the IP Multicast Routing Protocol folder in the Configuration folder an
203. ication number assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that the client shares a secret with InvalidServerAddr The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from unknown addresses Identifier The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS accounting client This is not necessarily the same as sysName in MIB ServerAddress The conceptual table listing the RADIUS accounting servers with which the client shares a secret ServerPortNumber The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server RoundTripTime The time interval between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent This does not include retransmissions Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct Delay have been updated as well as those in which they remain the same Responses The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server MalformedResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets which contained invalid authenticators received
204. ick Add A successful entry will be presented in the table below as shown in the example above To erase an entry from the table click the corresponding X of the entry you wish to delete VRRP VRRP or Virtual Routing Redundancy Protocol is a function on the Switch that dynamically assigns responsibility for a virtual router to one of the VRRP routers on a LAN The VRRP router that controls the IP address associated with a virtual router is called the Master and will forward packets sent to this IP address This will allow any Virtual Router IP address on the LAN to be used as the default first hop router by end hosts Utilizing VRRP the administrator can achieve a higher available default path cost without needing to configure every end host for dynamic routing or routing discovery protocols Statically configured default routes on the LAN are prone to a single point of failure VRRP is designed to eliminate these failures by setting an election protocol that will assign a responsibility for a virtual router to one of the VRRP routers the LAN When a virtual router fails the election protocol will select a virtual router with the highest priority to be the Master router on the LAN This retains the link and the connection is kept alive regardless of the point of failure To configure VRRP for virtual routers on the Switch an IP interface must be present on the system and it must be a part of a VLAN VRRP IP interfaces may be assigned to every VLA
205. iguration folder open the QoS folder and click 802 1 User Priority to view the screen shown below User Priority Configuration Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority ority Priority 5 Class 6 Figure 6 53 User Priority Configuration window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 70 Once you have assigned a priority to the port groups on the Switch you can then assign this Class to each of the7 levels of 802 1 priorities Click Apply to set your changes Traffic Segmentation Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single port to a group of ports on either a single Switch in standalone mode or a group of ports on another switch in a switch stack This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to using VLANs to limit traffic but is more restrictive It provides a method of directing traffic that does not increase the overhead of the Master switch CPU In the Configuration folder open the QoS folder and click Traffic Segmentation to view the screen shown below Current Traffic Segmentation Table Unst Port Map Figure 6 54 Current Traffic Segmentation Table Click on the Setup button to open the Setup Forwarding Ports page as shown below Unit Port Apply Unit 8 9 110 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 183 19 20 21 22
206. igure 2 Front Panel View of the 9724 5 as shipped Comprehensive LED indicators display the status of the Switch and the network Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 12 LED Indicators The Switch supports LED indicators for Power Master Console RPS SIO stacking indicators a seven segment Stack ID LED and Port LEDs The following shows the LED indicators for the Switch along with an explanation of each indicator Figure 3 LED Indicators LED Description Power This LED will light green after the Switch is powered on to indicate the ready state of the device The indicator is dark when the Switch is powered off Master This LED will light solid green when the Switch is configured to be a master switch of a switch stack in a ring topology or when it is in use as a stand alone switch This LED will remain dark if the Switch is not configured to be a master switch in a switch stack Console This LED should blink during the Power On Self Test POST When the POST is finished successfully the LED goes dark This indicator will light solid green when the Switch is being logged into via out of band local console management through the RS 232 console port in the front of the Switch using a straight through serial cable This LED will light solid amber if the Power On Self Test has failed RPS This LED will be lit when the internal power has failed and the RPS has taken over the power sup
207. ill be taken from This is the IP address of the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from This is the interval in seconds between requests for updated SNTP information Current Time Set Current Time Year Month Day Time in HH MM SS Click Apply to implement your changes Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 74 Enter the current year if you want to update the system clock Enter the current month if you would like to update the system clock Enter the current day if you would like to update the system clock Enter the current time in hours and minutes if you would like to update the system clock Time Zone and DST The following are screens used to configure time zones and Daylight Savings time settings for SNTP Open the Configuration folder then the SNTP folder and click on the Time Zone and DST link revealing the following screen ime Zone and DST Settings The following parameters can be set Parameter T Disabled 50 00 Figure 6 59 Zone DST Settings Page Description Daylight Saving Time State Daylight Saving Time Offset in Minutes Time Zone Offset from GMT in HH MM DST Repeating Settings From Which Day From Day of Week From Month From Time in HH MM To Which Day To Day of Week To Month To time in HH MM DST Annual Settings From Month From Day From Time in HH MM
208. ilure cae evi uda ies Rat SE OEM CER aio HE I P RIDGE BORG AE EVIE CE RE ARIS RUE EPS l6 External Redundant Power System 2 4 oer eR pre merit EE Eee iue ee A Hester etse ket ie dec UPON eV CE NM AN EE UE EIE NA ees l6 Connecting LEE T SIR ADS RES 17 To End Node 5 pete origen Ra Re Rate ha ae Gad be ME paene Ri pp re RF COCHE LAGE ERR OUR CE E Ra OE RR SE 17 Switch to H b or i edi e Wes I v ET RUE EROS Ty S ACE RE EE EACUS RUN RERO ON CIAO GY ata ow ie 17 Connecting To Network Backbone or Servers 5259 e ki EIE ERR E RET xim E ERI E ANE SEE EGER 18 Stacking and the AE9724TS exte anes aeq bs co de Dy ay marcada eA em dave Bed OS eere cx Leti d Rs Mela i RAI c Ee eere dd 18 Stacking Limitations utilizing a Ring Topology 4606 Phe Fe rage RR prb RADE RES PER AN ESA E d N I9 Introductiori To Switch Managementes a e See tiv Ne the em bee phate SN a i er e mt p ERO be peice eats tee EG be f EE SET 20 Al 9724 7S Gigabit layer 3 Switch Management Options ge A a Othe oS ae ads a LA RAE EDRO a ARNA EISE EUM Shea oye Mrs 20 Web based Management Interface d p ee PIU Sue Dele aperte mes ce pe qe
209. imes that the state machine sends an initial Access Request packet to the Authentication server i e executes sendRespToServer on entry to the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access Challenge packet from the Authentication server i e aReq becomes TRUE causing exit from the RESPONSE state Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an EAP Request packet other than an Identity Notification Failure or Success message to the Supplicant Le executes txReq on entry to the REQUEST state Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP method Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP Request and the response is something other than EAP NAK e rxResp becomes TRUE causing the state machine to transition from REQUEST to RESPONSE and the response is not an EAP NAK Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator s chosen EAP method Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server i e aSuccess becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to SUCCESS Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server Counts the number of time
210. improperly configured Switch stack can cause a broadcast storm Stacking Limitations Utilizing a Ring Topology There is a limit to the number of AT 9724TS Switches that can be stacked in a ring topology A maximum of 12 switches can be stacked Note All Switches must have the same firmware rev Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Chapter 4 Introduction to Switch Management 4 AT 9724TS Gigabit Layer 3 Switch Management Options 4 2 Web based Management Interface 4 3 SNMP Based Management 4 4 Command Line Console Interface Through The Serial Port 4 5 Connecting the Console Port RS 232 DCE 4 6 First Time Connecting to The Switch 4 7 Password Protection 4 8 SNMP Settings 4 9 IP Address Assignment 4 10 Connecting Devices to the Switch 4 AT 9724TS Gigabit Layer 3 Switch Management Options This system may be managed out of band through the console port on the front panel or in band using Telnet The user may also choose the web based management accessible through a web browser 4 2 Web based Management Interface After you have successfully installed the Switch you can configure the Switch monitor the LED panel and display statistics graphically using a web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5 0 4 3 SNMP Based Management You can manage the Switch with an SNMP compatible console program The Switch s
211. in the switch stack to be modified From To These two fields allow you to specify the range of ports that will be included in the Port based VLAN that you are creating using the 802 1 Q Static VLANs page GVRP The Group VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enables the port to dynamically become a member of a VLAN GVRP is Disabled by default Ingress Check This field can be toggled using the space bar between Enabled and Disabled Enabled enables the port to compare the VID tag of an incoming packet with the PVID number assigned to the port If the two are different the port filters drops the packet Disabled disables ingress filtering Ingress Checking is Disabled by default Acceptable Frame Type This field denotes the type of frame that will be accepted by the port The user may choose between Tagged Only which means only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted and Admit All which means both tagged and untagged frames will be accepted Admit_All is enabled by default PVID The read only field in the GVRP Table shows the current PVID assignment for each port which may be manually assigned to a VLAN when created in the 802 1 Q Static VLANs table The Switch s default is to assign all ports to the default VLAN with a VID of I The PVID is used by the port to tag outgoing untagged packets and to make filtering decisions about incoming packets If the port is specified to accept only tagged frames as tagging and an untagged packet is forwarded to
212. ind VID MAC Address Unit Port Type Next Clear Dynamic Entry View Entry Clear All Entry Enter a VLAN Name for the forwarding table to be browsed by Enter a MAC address for the forwarding table to be browsed by Select the switch Unit ID of the switch in the Switch stack and then the port by using the corresponding pull down menus Allows the user to move to a sector of the database corresponding to a user defined port VLAN or MAC address TheVLAN ID of the VLAN the port is a member of The MAC address entered into the address table Refers to the Unit of the switch stack that the MAC address was learned from The port that the MAC address above corresponds to How the Switch discovered the MAC address The possible entries are Dynamic Self and Static Click this button to view the next page of the address table Clicking this button will clear Dynamic entries learned the Switch This may be accomplished by VLAN Name or by Port Clicking this button will allow the user to view all entries of the address table Clicking this button will allow the user to delete all entries of the address table 9 7 Switch History Log The Web manager allows the Switch s history log as compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed view the Switch history log open the Monitoring folder and click the Switch History Log link Switch History SequencelT ime 14 2004 07 05 1
213. ing domain OSPF packet header Hello packet Database Description packet Link State Request packet Link State Update packet Link State Acknowledgment packet OSPF Packet Header Every OSPF packet is preceded by a common 24 byte header This header contains the information necessary for a receiving router to determine if the packet should be accepted for further processing The format of the OSPP packet header is shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 107 OSPF Packet Header Octets Version No Packet Length Router ID eo N A Area ID Checksum Authentication Type Authentication Authentication Figure 6 100 OSPF Packet Header Format Field Description Version No The OSPF version number Type The OSPF packet type The OSPF packet types are as follows Type Description Hello Database Description Link State Request Link State Update Link State Acknowledgment Packet Length The length of the packet in bytes This length includes the 24 byte header Router ID The Router ID of the packet s source Area ID A 32 bit number identifying the area that this packet belongs to AN OSPF packets are associated with a single area Packets traversing a virtual link are assigned the backbone Area ID of 0 0 0 0 Checksum A standard IP checksum that includes all of the packet s contents except for the 64 bit authentication field Authentication Type The t
214. ing formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age lt 2 x Forward Delay second Max Age lt 2 x Hello Time second MST Configuration Table The following screens in the MST Configuration Table window allow the user to configure a MSTI instance on the Switch These settings will uniquely identify a multiple spanning tree instance set the Switch The Switch initially possesses CIST or Common Internal Spanning Tree of which the user may modify the parameters for but cannot change the MSTI ID for and cannot be deleted To view the Current MST Configuration Identification window click Configuration Spanning Tree MST Configuration Table Add Current MST Configuration Identification Configuration Revision Level 00 00 88 77 9 00 0 VID List Delete 1 4094 x Configuration Name Revision Level 0 65535 Figure 6 24 Current MST Configuration Identification window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 45 The window above contains the following information Parameter Description Configuration Name A previously configured name set on the Switch to uniquely identify the MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance If a configuration name is not set this field will show the MAC address to the device running MSTP Revision Level This value along with the Configuration Name will identify the MSTP region configured on the Switch MSTI ID
215. ing the command show switch into the command line interface as shown below RT 972LT8 Port I0 100 1000 Stackable Ethernet Switch 00 00 88 77 6 00 16 0 8 1 Manual default 255 0 0 0 Default Gatonay 0 0 0 0 Boot PROM Version Build 1 01 tirewere Version Build 1 05 Hardware Version 31 Device S N System System Location tem Contact ing Tree IGH Snooping RIP H As PIM N OSPF Disabled Enabled TOP 23 0011 T Next Page Next Entry E ALI Figure 4 3 show switch command The Switch s MAC address can also be found from the Web management program on the Switch Information Basic Settings window in the Configuration menu The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config System ipaddress xox xxx xxx xxx yyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 23 Alternatively you can enter config ipif System ipaddr
216. ing this outbound router link for traffic of the specified TOS Network Links Advertisements Network links advertisements are Type 2 link state advertisements A network links advertisement is originated for each transit network in the area A transit network is a multi access network that has more than one attached router The network links advertisement is originated by the network s Designated router The advertisement describes all routers attached to the network including the Designated Router itself The advertisement s Link State ID field lists the IP interface address of the Designated Router The distance form the network to all attached routers is zero for all TOS This is why the TOS and metric fields need not be specified in the network links advertisement The format of the Network Links Advertisement is shown below Network Link Advertisements Octets 0 2 3 4 Link State ID Advertising Router Link State Sequence Number Link State Checksum Length Network Mask Attached Router Figure 6 108 Network Link Advertisements Field Description Network Mask The IP address mask for the network Attached Router The Router Ids of each of the routers attached to the network Only those routers that are fully adjacent to the Designated Router DR are listed The DR includes itself in this list Summary Link Advertisements Summary link advertisements are 3 and 4 link state advertisements These advertisem
217. ings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 22 AT 9724TS supports SNMP versions 2c and 3 You can specify which version of SNMP you want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v I and v 2 user authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same commun
218. ios idiomas das advert ncias de seguran a neste guia Importante Este ap ndice contiene traducciones en m ltiples idiomas de los mensajes de seguridad incluidos en esta gu a Obs Denna bilaga inneh ller flerspr kiga vers ttningar av s kerhetsmeddelandena i denna handledning Standards This product meets the following safety standards LIGHTNING DANGER DANGER DO NOT WORK on equipment or CABLES during periods of LIGHTNING ACTIVITY 2 AN CAUTION POWER CORD IS USED AS A DISCONNECTION DEVICE TO DE ENERGIZE EQUIPMENT disconnect the power cord 3 AN ELECTRICAL TYPE CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE EARTHED Power plug must be connected to a properly wired earth ground socket outlet improperly wired socket outlet could place hazardous voltages on accessible metal parts 4 A PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT the socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible 5 A CAUTION Air vents must not be blocked and must have free access to the room ambient air for cooling 6 A OPERATING TEMPERATURE This product is designed for a maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C 7 A ALL COUNTRIES Install product in accordance with local and National Electrical Codes Normen Dieses Produkt erf llt die Anforderungen der nachfolgenden Normen gt GEFAHR DURCH BLITZSCHLAG GEFAHR Keine Arbeiten am Ger t oder an den Kabeln w hrend eines Gewitters ausf hren 2 AN VORSICHT DAS NETZKABEL DIENT Z
219. is parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is based on the Ethernet protocol rarp Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Reverse Address Resolution RARP Protocol ipx802dot3 Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by Novell NetWare 802 3 IPX Internet Packet Exchange ipx802dot2 Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by Novell NetWare 802 2 IPX Internet Packet Exchange ipxSnap Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by Novell and the Sub Network Access Protocol SNAP ipxEthernet2 Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Ethernet Protocol AppleTalk Using this para
220. is reset in the advertisement s Option field only a route for TOS 0 is described by the advertisement Otherwise routes for the other TOS values are also described If a cost for a certain TOS is not included its cost defaults to that specified for TOS 0 Field Description Network Mask For Type 3 link state advertisements this indicates the destination network s IP address mask For example when advertising the location of a class A network the value Oxff000000 TOS The Type of Service that the following cost is relevant to Metric The cost of this route Expressed in the same units as the interface costs in the router links advertisements Autonomous Systems External Link Advertisements Autonomous Systems AS link advertisements are Type 5 link state advertisements These advertisements are originated by AS boundary routers A separate advertisement is made for each destination known to the router that is external to the AS AS external link advertisements usually describe a particular external destination For these advertisements the Link State ID field specifies an IP network number AS external link advertisements are also used to describe a default route Default routes used when no specific route exists to the destination When describing a default route the Link Stat ID is always set the Default Destination address 0 0 0 0 and the Network Mask is set to 0 0 0 0 The format of the AS External Link Advertisement is shown
221. itch s management software After your initial login define new passwords for both default user names to prevent unauthorized access to the Switch and record the passwords for future reference To create an administrator level account for the Switch do the following At the CLI login prompt enter create account admin followed by the user name and press the Enter key You will be asked to provide a password Type the password used for the administrator account being created and press the Enter key You will be prompted to enter the same password again to verify it Type the same password and press the Enter key Successful creation of the new administrator account will be verified by a Success message a Note Passwords are case sensitive User names and passwords can be up to 15 characters in length The sample below illustrates a successful creation of a new administrator level account with the user name newmanager AT 9724TS 4 create account admin newmanager Command create account admin newmanager Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success AT 9724TS 4 A Caution CLI configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the Switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must use the save command to copy the running configuration file to the startup configuration 4 8 SNMP Sett
222. ity string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP and v 2 management access are public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects SNMP v 3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNIMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMP v I while assigning higher level of security to another group granting read write privileges using SNMP v 3 Using SNMP v 3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional layer of security is available for SNMP v 3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMP v 3 settings for the Switch read the sec
223. k use the pull down menu at the top of the window and click Apply A polling interval between 60 seconds can be set using the drop down menu at the top of the window and clicking OK The information on this window is described as follows Parameter Description Auth PAE State The Authenticator PAE State value can be Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held Force_Auth Force_Unauth or N A N A Not Available indicates that the port s authenticator capability is disabled Backend State The Backend Authentication State can be Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize or N A N A Not Available indicates that the port s authenticator capability is disabled Port Status Controlled Port Status can be Authorized Unauthorized or N A MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Authenticator Up to 16 MAC address can be implemented for MAC based 802 1x Authenticator Statistics This table contains the statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function To view the Authenticator Statistics click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator Statistics Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 172 EEZZZEEZEESZESEEZEZEEZE Figure 9 24 Authenticator Statistics window The user can specify a
224. k Apply to enter the settings into the Switch s Traffic Segmentation table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch H Clicking the Apply button will enter the combination of transmitting port and allowed receiving ports into the Switch s Traffic Segmentation Table 6 19 System Log Server The Switch can send Syslog messages to up to four designated servers using the System Log Server In the Configuration folder click System Log Server to view the screen shown below Add Current System Log Servers Index Server Status Delete 10 53 13 94 Figure 6 56 System Log Servers window The parameters configured for adding and editing System Log Server settings are the same To add a new Syslog Server click the Add button To modify a current entry click the hyperlinked number of the server in the Index field Both actions will result in the same screen to configure See the table below for a description of the parameters in the following window Configure System Log Server Edit Index 1 4 fi Server IP 0000 Severity ALL Facility fi 0 UDP Port 6000 65535 514 Status Disabled D phow AN System Log Servers Figure 6 57 System Log Servers Add The following parameters can be set Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 72 Parameter Description Index Server IP Severity Facility UDP Por
225. k group click the corresponding X under the Delete heading in the Current Link Aggregation Group Entries table Link Aggregation Group Configuration Group ID Group Name LACP Disabled Master 1 Mi Porti Choose Member 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 118 19 20 21 22 23 24 Ports Flooding Port Apply Note 1 It is only valid to set up at most 5 member ports of any one trunk group and a port can be member of only one trunk group at ime w All Lek Aggregatnon Gr ur Entoes Figure 6 10 Link Aggregation Group Configuration window Add Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 35 Link Aggregation Group Configuration BO 11 12 13 14 15 16 Figure 6 1 Link Aggregation Group Configuration window Modify The user changeable parameters are as follows Parameter Group ID State Master Port Member Ports Flooding Port Active Port Type Description Select an ID number for the group between and 32 Trunk groups can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled This is used to turn a port trunking group on or off This is useful for diagnostics to quickly isolate a bandwidth intensive network device or to have an absolute backup aggregation group that is not under automatic control Choose the Master Port for the trunk group using the pull down menu Choose the members of a trunked group 2 to 8 ports can be assig
226. ket carries a collection of link state advertisements one hop further from its origin Several link state advertisements may be included in a single packet Link State Update packets are multicast on those physical networks that support multicast broadcast In order to make the flooding procedure reliable flooded advertisements are acknowledged in Link State Acknowledgment packets If retransmission of certain advertisements is necessary the retransmitted advertisements are always carried by unicast Link State Update packets The format of the Link State Update packet is shown below OSPF Link State Update Packet Octets o N 3 A Version No Packet Length Router ID Area ID Checksum Authentication Type Authentication Authentication Number of Advertisements Link State Advertisements Figure 6 104 Link State Update Packet The body of the Link State Update packet consists of a list of link state advertisements Each advertisement begins with a common 20 byte header the link state advertisement header Otherwise the format of each of the five types of link state advertisements is different Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Link State Acknowledgment Packet Link State Acknowledgment packets are OSPF packet type 5 To make the folding of link state advertisements reliable flooded advertisements are explicitly acknowledged This acknowledgment is accomplished thr
227. ket is forwarded and the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping packets that are not on the same VLAN as the ingress port at the point of reception This eliminates the subsequent processing of packets that will just be dropped by the destination port Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID I called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLANs are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default Packets cannot cross VLANs If a member of one VLAN wants to connect to another VLAN the link must be through an external router a Note If no VLANs are configured on the Switch then all packets will be forwarded to any destination port Packets with unknown source addresses will be flooded to all ports Broadcast and multicast packets will also be flooded to all ports Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 57 An example is presented below VLAN Name VID Switch Ports System default 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 Engineering 2 9 10 11 12 Marketing 3 13 14 15 16 Finance 4 17 18 19 20 Sales 5 1 2 3 4 Table 6 3 VLAN Example Assigned Ports Port based VLANs Port based VLANs limit traffic that flows into and out of switch ports Thus al
228. l devices connected to a port are members of the VLAN s the port belongs to whether there is a single computer directly connected to a switch or an entire department On port based VLANs NICs do not need to be able to identify 802 10 tags in packet headers NICs send and receive normal Ethernet packets If the packet s destination lies on the same segment communications take place using normal Ethernet protocols Even though this is always the case when the destination for a packet lies on another switch port VLAN considerations come into play to decide if the packet gets dropped by the Switch or delivered VLAN Segmentation Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port that is a member of VLAN 2 If the destination lies on another port found through a normal forwarding table lookup the Switch then looks to see if the other port Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 and can therefore receive VLAN 2 packets If Port 10 is not a member of VLAN 2 then the packet will be dropped by the Switch and will not reach its destination If Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 the packet will go through This selective forwarding feature based on VLAN criteria is how VLANs segment networks The key point being that Port will only transmit on VLAN 2 Network resources such as printers and servers however can be shared across VLANs This is achieved by setting up overlapping VLANs That is ports can belong to more than one VLAN group For examp
229. le Admin part of this section for more detailed information concerning the Enable Admin command To view the following screen click Security Management gt Access Authentication Control gt Login Method Lists Note Maxzimum of 8 entnes Login Method List Settings Method List Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 Delete local Figure 7 12 Login Method Lists Settings window The Switch contains one Method List that is set and cannot be removed yet can be modified To delete a Login Method List defined by the user click the X under the Delete heading corresponding to the entry desired to be deleted modify a Login Method List click on its hyperlinked Method List Name To configure a new Method List click the Add button Both actions will result in the same screen to configure Login Method List Edit Method List Name Getault Method 1 ocal Keyword Method 2 1 Method 3 Method 4 Show All Authentication Loman Method Lest Entnes 452 Figure 7 13 Login Method List Edit default Login Method List Add Method List Name Method 1 Method 2 hS C TT 3 Method 4 Show All Authentication Logn Method L Figure 7 14 Login Method List Add Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 139 To define a Login Method List set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Method List Name Enter a method list name defined b
230. le setting VLAN members to ports 2 3 and 4 and VLAN 2 members to ports 1 5 6 and 7 Port belongs to two VLAN groups Ports 8 9 and 10 are not configured to any VLAN group This means ports 8 9 and 10 are in the same VLAN group VLAN and Trunk Groups The members of a trunk group have the same VLAN setting Any VLAN setting on the members of a trunk group will apply to the other member ports u Note In order to use VLAN segmentation in conjunction with port trunk groups you can first set the port trunk group s and then you may configure VLAN settings If you wish to change the port trunk grouping with VLANs already in place you will not need to reconfigure the VLAN settings after changing the port trunk group settings VLAN settings will automatically change in conjunction with the change of the port trunk group settings Protocol VLANs AT 9724TS incorporates the idea of protocol based VLANs This standard defined the IEEE 802 1 standard maps packets to protocol defined VLANs by examining the type octet within the packet header to discover the type of protocol associated with it After assessing the protocol the Switch will forward the packets to all ports within the protocol assigned VLAN This feature will benefit the administrator by better balancing load sharing and enhancing traffic classification The Switch supports fifteen 15 pre defined protocols for configuration The user may also choose a protocol that is
231. le Gigabit Ethernet Switch 189 Appendix A Technical Specifications General Standard Protocols Data Transfer Rates Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Fibre Optic Topology Network Cables Physical amp Environmental AC inputs amp External Redundant Power Supply Power Consumption DC fans Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Dimensions Weight EMC Safety IEEE 802 3u 100 Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 1 P QVLAN IEEE 802 3x Full duplex Flow Control IEEE 802 3 Nway auto negotiation CSMA CD Half duplex Full duplex IOMbps 20Mbps 100Mbps 200Mbps 1000Mbps 2000Mbps IEC 793 2 1992 Type Ala 50 125um multi mode Type Alb 62 5 125um multi mode Both types use LC optical connector Ring UTP Cat 5 for 100Mbps UTP Cat 3 4 5 for 10Mbps EIA TIA 568 100 ohm screened twisted pair 5 100 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz internal universal power supply 90 watts maximum 2 built in 40 x 40 x 10 mm fans built in 60 x 60 x 18 mm fan 0 to 40 degrees C 25 to 55 degrees C Operating 5 to 9576 RH non condensing Storage 0 to 9576 RH non condensing 441 mm x 207 mm x 44 mm 10 19 inch rackmount width 3 15 kg FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class Canada EN55022 Class EN55024 CSA International Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 190 Performance Transmission Method
232. le or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm The default is Enabled HMAC RSA HMAC DSA Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the RSA encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Digital Signature Algorithm encryption The default is Enabled Click Apply to implement changes made SSH User Authentication The following windows are used to configure parameters for users attempting to access the Switch through SSH To access the following window click Security Management gt Secure Shell gt SSH User Authentication Current Accounts User Name Auth Mode Host Name Host IP Password Figure 7 25 Current Accounts window In the example screen above the User Account Trinity has been previously set using the User Accounts window in the Security Management folder A User Account MUST be set in order to set the parameters for the SSH user To configure the parameters for a SSH user click on the hyperlinked User Name in the Current Accounts window which will reveal the following window to configure User Name Auth Mode Host Host Trinity Show All User Authticanon Entnes The user may set the following parameters Figure 7 2
233. led 128 17 Duabied Disabled Disabled 128 18 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 19 Disabled Disabled Diazabled 128 20 Disabled Dicabled 128 21 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 22 Disabled Disabled Disabled 128 TS y t Figure 6 44 Traffic Control Settings and Traffic Control Table window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch To configure Traffic Control first select the Switch s Unit ID number from the pull down menu and then a group of ports by using the Group pull down menu Finally enable or disable the Broadcast Storm Multicast Storm and Destination Unknown using their corresponding pull down menus The purpose of this window is to limit too many broadcast multicast or unknown unicast packets folding the network Each port has a counter that tracks the number of broadcast packets received per second and this counter is cleared once every second If the broadcast multicast or unknown unicast storm control is enabled the port will discard all broadcast multicast or unknown unicast packets received when the counter exceeds or equals the Threshold specified The Threshold value is the upper threshold at which the specified traffic control is switched on This is the number of Broadcast Multicast or DLF packets in Kpps kilopackets per second received by the Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measures The Threshold value can be set from 0 to 255 kilopackets per second The def
234. lege AE EE EE RR dE e gabe ER E RTRPERNSET 91 RADIUS Server 6 0058 ant A TAURO RE ERRURLRIA SG E TA DUC NAD Layer 3 IP Networking L yer 3 Global Advanced Settings 55 5e s pore ea SE TE UE exte uie doloreet siete ahah I dte loss EE E ANE A 93 Setting Up IP Interfaces ms ticle qt eR iR LAINE WR EL UII RR Idus dicU esl INO ERI MEET 93 MDS Key Table Config ratiOn x x oer acs bya ESO Rede Unt Tess tute Bie Duc de Eu eee Sc aan ku Dae ea A ee ele lace Dod Dd e E 95 Ro te Redistribution Settings dee dense Pe hem e pue S Pepe esae Pe RT ee pego S Pe TE dre na s e RP Yin dat ee as 96 Static Diefaule Route osse x urere boum ea eb e disque epos GO Te PST CV P EA EX WEIS FORT EE REX 97 Ro te Preference Settings i i eel el pp nbi Sia e d cos Re ie ep See e shi b RE de dE d ER con Sp gts eier 98 Static ARP Table me tr Eee KBs ERE USE IA REUS EEN EE EE dE EE AE OG 100 gnus eg ere E top Se RES I EI e pq ni ee e RECEDIT RE 100 RIPI R te Interpretatione susce erg Chur EE nae SED Aquae UNE Mog A Eier e ded eg qs e 101 RIP Config ration ec eso LES D PME KAP QU ec nse
235. lets say a user wishes to have a video conference between two remotely set computers The administrator can add priority tags to the video packets being sent out utilizing the Access Profile commands Then on the receiving end the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets for this tag acquires the tagged packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch Then in turn the administrator will set a priority for this queue so that will be emptied before any other packet is forwarded This results the end user receiving all packets sent as quickly as possible thus prioritizing the queue and allowing for an uninterrupted stream of packets which optimizes the use of bandwidth available for the video conference Understanding QoS The Switch has eight priority classes of service one of which is internal and unconfigurable These priority classes of service are labelled as 6 the high class to 0 the lowest class The eight priority tags specified in IEEE 802 are mapped to the Switch s priority classes of service as follows Priority 0 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 class Priority is assigned to the Switch s QO class Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s QI class Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 class Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s O4 class Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q5 class Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q6 class Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q6 class For strict priority b
236. letter attached to it it denotes a firmware upgrade through the web based management interface User States the user who downloaded the firmware This field may read Anonymous or Unknown for users that are not identified Config Firmware Image The Config Firmware Image window allows users to configure firmware images saved in the memory of the Switch To access the following window click Maintenance gt MULTIPLE IMAGE Services gt Config Firmware Image Config Firmware Image Figure 10 6 Config Firmware Image window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 186 This window offers the following information Parameter Description Image Select the firmware image to be configured using the pull down menu The Switch allows two firmware images to be stored in the Switch s memory Active This field has two options for configuration Delete Select this option to delete the firmware image specified in the Image field above Boot Select this option to set the firmware image specified above as the boot up firmware for the Switch This firmware will be set as the boot up firmware after a switch reboot has been performed The default setting has firmware image ID as the boot up firmware image for the Switch unless specified here Click Apply to implement changes made 10 4 Ping Test Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IP address you specify The destinatio
237. ll be connected directly to the Server Server IP Enter the IP address of the DHCP BootP server Up to four Server IPs can be configured per IP Interface DNS Relay Computer users usually prefer to use text names for computers they may want to open a connection with Computers themselves require 32 bit IP addresses Somewhere a database of network devices text names and their corresponding IP addresses must be maintained The Domain Name System DNS is used to map names to IP addresses throughout the Internet and has been adapted for use within intranets For two DNS servers to communicate across different subnets the DNS Relay of the Switch must be used The DNS servers are identified by IP addresses Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 123 Mapping Domain Names to Addresses Name to address translation is performed by a program called Name server The client program is called a Name resolver A Name resolver may need to contact several Name servers to translate a name to an address The Domain Name System DNS servers are organized in a somewhat hierarchical fashion A single server often holds names for a single network which is connected to a root DNS server usually maintained by an ISP Domain Name Resolution The domain name system can be used by contacting the name servers one at a time or by asking the domain name system to do the complete name translation The client makes a que
238. ll previously configured VLANs by VLAN ID and VLAN Name To delete an existing 802 1 Q VLAN click the corresponding button under the Delete heading To create a new 802 1 Q VLAN click the Add button in the 802 10 Static VLANs menu A new menu will appear as shown below to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new menu 802110 Static VLANs ho TT Type Protocol ID GEN Defined Packet ID EE pon s e EE Settings iw iviiviiviviviviviviivieivivivivii ii 1 Ze 6 8 6 6 6 8 85 Ge ZS COCR fe GZ COR ZG SZ amp ZS Egress 28 4 i E Forbidden Port ST ACIES Jee Eet Le Ve EIE Figure 6 41 802 1Q Static VLANs Add To return to the Current 802 1Q Static VLANs Entries window click the Show All Static VLAN Entries link To change an existing 802 1 Q VLAN entry click the Modify button of the corresponding entry you wish to modify A new menu will appear to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the newVLAN See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new menu 802 19 Static VLANs Init VID Ads E abled JE 1QVLAN Port Settings 112 131415 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 RN NR A bk MR WM JW Ae Figure 6 42 802 1 Sta
239. lows for the selection of one of six methods of calculating the metric value The user may choose between All Internal External ExtType ExtType2 Inter ET Inter E2 See the table above for available metric value types for each source protocol Allows the entry of an OSPF interface cost This is analogous to a Hop Count in the RIP routing protocol Click Add Modify to implement changes made oo Note source protocol Src Protocol entry and the destination protocol Dest Protocol entry cannot be the same Static Default Route Entries into the Switch s forwarding table can be made using both MAC addresses and IP addresses Static IP forwarding is accomplished by the entry of an IP address into the Switch s Static IP Routing Table Static Default Route Settings IP Adderss This window shows the following values Parameter IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Hops Protocol Backup State Delete Subnet Mask Gateway Hops Protocol Backup State Delete Figure 6 90 Static Default Route Settings window Description The IP address of the Static Default Route The corresponding Subnet Mask of the IP address entered into the table The corresponding Gateway of the IP address entered into the table Represents the metric value of the IP interface entered into the table This field may read a number between 1 65535 for an OSPF setting and 1 16 for a RIP setting Represents the protocol used for the Routing T
240. ls are separate entities and are not compatible with each other Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Authentication Server Hosts This window will set user defined Authentication Server Hosts for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with Authentication Policy enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 To view the following window click Security Management gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Host Note Maxamum of 16 Authentication Server Host Settings IP Address Protocol Port Timeout IRetransmit Delete TACACS Figure 7 10 Authentication Server Host Settings window To add an Authentication Server Host click the Add button revealing the following window lAuthentication Server Host Setting Add Adds ess Figure 7 l Authentication Server Host Setting window Add Configure the following parameters
241. lts can be seen in the table under the configuration settings as seen below GVRP Settings Unit fi 1 Disabled v Enebied sx At Apply From To GVRP lingress Acceptable Check Frame Type GVRP Table Port 10 h mb mb A w gt u mb wb mb mb 4 o PMN Ai ab adb ab ah ah eb ah ah ad d ob sch o ol wech l l sch l l l Ingress Check Disabled Enabled l Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Ai Frames Disabled Enabled l Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Ai Frames Disabled Enabled Ai Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Ai Frames Disabled Enabled Ai Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled All Frames Disaied Enabled Al Frames Disshted Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled Al Frames Disabled Enabled At Frames Disebed Enabled All Frames Acceptable Frame Type Figure 6 43 GVRP Settings and Table window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 62 The following fields can be set Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch
242. meter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the AppleTalk protocol decLAT Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Digital Equipment Corporation DEC Local Area Transport LAT protocol decOther Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Digital Equipment Corporation DEC Protocol sna802dot2 Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Systems Network Architecture SNA 802 2 Protocol netBios Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the NetBIOS Protocol xns Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Xerox Network Systems XNS Protocol vines Using this paramete
243. ming where the timing comes form a data stream received from the master If one connection is set for 1000M Full M the other side of the connection must be set for 000M Full S Any other configuration will result in a link down status for both ports Flow Control Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations Ports configured for full duplex use 802 3x flow control half duplex ports use backpressure flow control and Auto ports use an automatic selection of the two The default is Disabled Learning Enable or disable MAC address learning for the selected ports When Enabled destination and source addresses are automatically listed in the forwarding table When learning is Disabled MAC addresses must be manually entered into the forwarding table This is sometimes done for reasons of security or efficiency See the section on Forwarding Filtering for information on entering MAC addresses into the forwarding table The default setting is Disabled Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch 6 5 Port Description The AT 9724TS supports port description feature where the user may name various ports on the Switch To assign names to various ports click the Port Description on the Configuration menu Port Description Setting Unit Fram Description Apply Poti j 41 Apply Port Description Table Unit 1 Port Description Figure 6 6 Port Description Setting and Po
244. mining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier will become the Root Bridge The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds Any port on the Switch spends this time in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Used to set the number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU bridge protocol data unit packet sent by the Switch will be discarded Each switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero The Switch will then discard the BDPU packet and the information held for the port will age out The user may set a hop count from to 20 The default is 20 Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval The count can be specified from 1 to IO The default is 3 This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Note Hello Time cannot be longer than the Hax Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Observe the follow
245. n 1 Port Auth PAE State Backend State Pert Status Force Auth Success Force Auth Success Force Auth Success Force Auth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success Force Auth Success Force Auth Success Force Auth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success Force Auth Success ForceAuth Success Force Auth Success Figure 6 79 Initialize Port window Port based This window allows you to initialize a port or group of ports The Initialize Port Table in the bottom half of the window displays the current status of the port s This window displays the following information Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified From and To Select ports to be initialized Port A read only field indicating a port on the Switch Auth PAE State Backend State Port Status The Authenticator PAE State will display one of the following Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth ForceUnauth and N A The Backend Authentication State will display one of the following Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize and N A The status of the controlled port can be Authorized Unauthorized or N A Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS
246. n node then responds to or echoes the packets sent from the Switch This is very useful to verify connectivity between the Switch and other nodes on the network Enter the IP address of the device or stahon you want to ping then click Start Target IP Address undefined Repeat Pinging for Infinite times C times 1 255 Start Figure 10 7 Ping Test The user may use Infinite times radio button in the Repeat Pinging for field which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped The user may opt to choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by clicking its radio button and entering a number between and 255 Click Start to initiate the Ping program Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 187 10 5 Save Changes The AT 9724TS has two levels of memory normal RAM and non volatile or NV RAM Configuration changes are made effective clicking the Apply button When this is done the settings will be immediately applied to the switching software in RAM and will immediately take effect Some settings though require you to restart the Switch before they will take effect Restarting the Switch erases all settings in RAM and reloads the stored settings from the NV RAM Thus it is necessary to save all setting changes to NV RAM before rebooting the switch To retain any configuration changes
247. n specify a switch in a switch stack using that switch s Unit ID by using the pull down menu in the top left hand corner user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 5 and 60s where 5 stands for seconds The default value is one second The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Port Connect Enter Connect LogOff Auth Enter Auth Success Auth Timeout Auth Fail Auth Reauth Auth Start Auth LogOff Authed Reauth The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other state Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL Logoff message Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING as a result of an EAP Response Identity message being received from the Supplicant Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant authSuccess TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout authTimeou
248. n the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1 user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 p see the QoS section of this manual Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value in a packet that meets the selected criteria with the value entered in the adjacent field Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Enter an IP Address mask for the source IP address Enter an IP Address mask for the destination IP address This field allows the user to enter a DSCP value in the space provided which will instruct the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding The user may choose a value between 0 and 63 This field allows the user to modify the protocol used to configure the Access Rule Table depending on which protocol the user has chosen in the Access Profile Table To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click Wiew in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 80 Access Rule Display Figure 6 66 Access Rule Display window IP To configure the Access Rule
249. n to enable or disable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard 5128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard 5192 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES 256 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the Cast128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish 128 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish 92 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish256 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 146 Data Integrity Algorithm HMAC SHAI HMAC MD5 Public Key Algorithm Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Secure Hash algorithm The default is Enabled Use the pull down to enab
250. nction is only operable if the Mode in the Port Security window is selected as Permanent or DeleteOnReset or in other words only addresses that are permanently learned by the Switch can be deleted Once the entry has been defined by entering the correct information into the window above click the under the Delete heading of the corresponding MAC address to be deleted Click the Next button to view the next page of entries listed in this table This window displays the following information Parameter Description VID TheVLAN ID of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch VLAN NAME The VLAN Name of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch MAC Address The MAC address of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch Unit The ID number of the Switch in the switch stack that has permanently learned the MAC address Port The ID number of the port that has permanently learned the MAC address Type The type of MAC address in the forwarding database table Only entries marked Secured Permanent can be deleted Delete Click the in this field to delete the corresponding MAC address that was permanently learned by the Switch Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 6 18 The AT 9724TS supports 802 1 priority queuing Quality of Service The following sec
251. nd in this section under the heading MULTIPLE IMAGE Services The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch Enter the path and the filename to the firmware file on the TFTP server Note that in the above example the firmware file is in the root directory of the D drive of the TFTP server The TFTP server must be running TFTP server software to perform the file transfer TFTP server software is a part of many network management software packages such as NetSight or can be obtained as a separate program Click Start to record the IP address of the TFTP server and begin the file transfer Download Configuration File To download a configuration file from a TFTP server click on the TFTP Service folder in the Maintenance folder and then the Download Configuration File link Download Configuration Figure 10 2 Download Configuration File window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 184 Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and specify the location of the switch configuration file on the TFTP server Click Start to initiate the file transfer Upload Configuration To upload the Switch s settings to a TFTP server click on the TFTP Service folder in the Maintenance folder and then click the Save Settings link pload Configuration server Address Figure 10 3 Upload Configuration window Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and the path and filename for
252. nd properties for individual physical ports including port speed and address learning Clicking on Port Configurations in the Configuration menu will display the following window for the user Disadiod f Ota ated Aay 1 Auto Enstled Disabled Lak Down Enabled Enabled Disabled Down Enabled Enabled Auto Duabied Lak Down Enatied Enabled Auto Duabied Down Enabled Enatled Duabied Down Enabled Enabled Disabled Down Ens led Enstled Anto Disabled Lak Down Enssled Enatled Disabled Lak Down Enabled Enabled Disabled Down Enabied Enabled Duabied Lek Down Enabled Enatled Thasbied Lek Down Enabled Enabled Lk Down Enabled Enabled Duabied Lak Down Fried Enabled Auto Duabied Lek Down Enabled Auto Disabled Enasled Br iel __ Trashed Link Down Enabled Figure 6 5 Port Configuration and The Port Information Table window To configure switch ports l Choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From To port pull down menus and the Unit ID of the Switch to be configured 2 Use the remaining pull down menus to configure the parameters described below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Parameter Description State Toggle the State Enabled field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports
253. ned to an individual group A trunking group must designate one port to allow transmission of broadcasts and unknown unicasts Shows the port that is currently forwarding packets This pull down menu allows you to select between Static and LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP allows for the automatic detection of links in a Port Trunking Group After setting the previous parameters click Apply to allow your changes to be implemented Successfully created trunk groups will be show in the Current Link Aggregation Group Entries 6 8 LACP Port Setting The LACP Port Setting window is used in conjunction with the Link Aggregation window to create port trunking groups on the Switch Using the following window the user may set which ports will be active and passive in processing and sending LACP control frames Darzwe 2 4 5 6 Dass P arame 10 Paene n 12 P arame 4 Dass Parmer Dass Parame 1 P asame 23 24 Figure 6 12 LACP Port Setting and LACP Port Information window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 36 The user may set the following parameters Parameter Description Unit Choose the switch in the switch stack to be configured by using the pull down menu From To A consecutive group of por
254. ng traffic on a network where many different types of data may be transmitted simultaneously It is intended to alleviate problems associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks The quality of applications that are dependent on such time critical data such as video conferencing can be severely and adversely affected by even very small delays in transmission Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802 1 standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of data packets These devices can also assign a priority label or tag to packets Compliant devices can also strip priority tags from packets This priority tag determines the packet s degree of expeditiousness and determines the queue to which it will be assigned Priority tags are given values from 0 to 7 with 0 being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the highest The highest priority tag 7 is generally only used for data associated with video or audio applications which are sensitive to even slight delays or for data from specified end users whose data transmissions warrant special consideration The Switch allows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network Using queues to manage priority tagged data allows you to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network There may be circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently tagged packets into the sam
255. ngs for a particular port select the Port number and the Unit ID number of the switch in the switch stack located in the top left hand corner of the screen and click Apply To modify the settings for a particular MSTI Instance click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID which will reveal the following window Parameter Instance ID Internal cost 0 Auto Priority Show Port Information Table Port 1 of Urat 1 Figure 6 29 MSTI Settings window Description Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being configured An entry of 0 in this field denotes the CIST default MSTI Internal cost 0 Auto This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports when an interface Priority is selected within a STP instance The default setting is 0 auto There are two options 0 auto Selecting this parameter for the internal Cost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for an interface The default value is derived from the media speed of the interface value 1 2000000 Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 1 2000000 will set the quickest route when a loop occurs A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface A higher priority will designate the interface to forward packets first A lower number denotes a higher priority This entry must be divisible by 16 The default priority
256. ngs window in the STP Version field 2 The correct spanning tree priority for the MSTP instance must be entered defined here as a Priority in the STP Instance Settings window when configuring an MSTI ID settings 3 VLANs that will be shared must be added to the MSTP Instance ID defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Table window when configuring an MSTI ID settings Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 42 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree The Switch implements three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 15 the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 Iw specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802 14 STP RSTP can operate with legacy equipment implementing IEEE 802 14 however the advantages of using RSTP will be lost The IEEE 802 1 w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP evolved from the 802 14 STP standard RSTP was developed in order to overcome some limitations of STP that impede the function of some recent switching innovations in particular certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches The basic function and much of the terminology is the same as STP Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for RSTP This section introduces some new Spanning Tree concepts and illustrates the main differences between the two protocols Port Transition St
257. nual under Layer 3 IP Networking Browse IP Address The Browse IP Address window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder The Browse IP Address window is a read only screen where the user may view IP addresses discovered by the Switch search a specific IP address enter it into the field labelled IP Address at the top of the screen and click Find to begin your search IP Address Table Interface System Systern System System System System System System System System System Systetn System System Systetn System System System System System Address 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 121 10 0 1 100 10 0 25 1 10 0 34 1 10 0 46 1 10 0 51 1 10 0 58 4 10 0 85 168 10 1 1 1 10 1 1 4 10 1 1 80 10 1 1 101 10 1 1 102 10 1 1 103 10 1 1 163 10 1 1 164 10 1 1 166 10 1 1 167 10 1 1 168 Figure 9 29 Browse IP Address Table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Port 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 119 1 19 1 19 119 Find Learned Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynanuc Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Next 178 Browse Routing Table The Browse Routing Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder This screen shows the current IP routing table of the Swi
258. number it makes an entry into its forwarding table These entries are then used to forward packets through the Switch To view the MAC Address forwarding table from the Monitoring menu click the MAC Address link Find Clear Dyneric Entry VLAN Name MAC Address 100 00 00 00 00 00 Find Find E Clear Dnemic Entry ddress Table Address Port ype 1 deini 00 00 48 M 62 23 1 1 Dynaerac 1 4 00 00 55 46 03 00 1 1 Dynast 1 defaut 00 00 5 00 01 1 1 defaut 00 00 5e 00 01 fa Dynamic 1 dmi 00 00 80 3 09 89 1 I Dynamic 1 defaut 00 00 e2 2 44 ec 1 1 Dynamic 1 00 00 e2 4 57 03 1 1 Dynamic 1 demi 00 00 2 22 74 90 1 1 Dynamic 1 defmit 00 00 2 93 65 06 1 1 Dynamic 1 defmit 00 01 02 03 04 00 1 1 Dynaezic 1 definit 00 01 02 03 04 01 1 1 Dynaerac 1 deini 00 01 02 03 92 27 1 1 Dynaerac 1 00 01 24 02 45 00 1 1 Dynaerac 1 defaut 00 01 30 12 13 02 1 1 Dynaerac 1 defaut 00 02 06 12 34 56 1 Dynasvec 1 00 03 09 18 10 01 1 1 Dynamic 1 defaut 00 03 11 04 10 00 1 I Dynamic 1 defaut 00 03 47 91 4 1 1 1 Dynamic 1 demi 00 03 64 16 76 79 1 1 Dynamic 1 default 00 04 13 04 03 01 1 1 Dynamic Total Entries 332 Figure 9 17 MAC Address Table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch The following fields can be viewed or set Parameter Description VLAN Name MAC Address Unit Port F
259. o Setting 0 for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost OOMbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 value 1 200000000 Define a value between and 200000000 to determine the external cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets This field will show the priority and MAC address of the Regional Internal Root Bridge This MAC address should be the MAC address of the Switch This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports when an interface is selected within a STP instance The default setting is 0 auto There are two options 0 auto Selecting this parameter for the internalCost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for an interface The default value is derived from the media speed of the interface value 1 2000000 Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 2000000 will set the quickest route when a loop occurs A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission This field will show the priority and MAC address of the Designated Bridge The information shown in this table comes from a BPDU packet originating from this bridge This is the port on the Switch that is physically connected to the Root Bridge The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulat
260. o the Switch s history log is made The table displays the last entry highest sequence number first Time Displays the time in days hours and minutes since the Switch was last restarted Log Text Displays text describing the event that triggered the history log entry 9 8 IGMP Snooping Group This window allows the Switch s IGMP Snooping Table to be viewed IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and the corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch The number of IGMP reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reports field To view the IGMP Snooping table click IGMP Snooping Group on the Monitoring menu VLAN Name Search Total Entries 0 IGMP Snooping Group Table VLAN Name Multicast Group Address Reports 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port Member 3FIBSIBSEIIBIEPJETIPIFHPPIESERTUEFTTHIEJET 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Figure 9 19 IGMP Snooping Group Table The user may search the IGMP Snooping Table by VLAN Name by entering it in the top left hand corner and clicking Search The following field can be viewed Parameter Description VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the multicast group Multicast Group The IP address of the multicast group MAC Address The MAC address of the multicast group Reports The total number of reports received for this group Port Member These are the ports where the IGMP packets w
261. oS queue specified previously by the user Replace priority with Click the corresponding box if you want to re write the 802 1 default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1 user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1 see the QoS section of this manual This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified value 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 5th byte value 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 value 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 value 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 value 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click View in the Access Rule Table to view the following screen Access Rule Display Profile ID Access ID Type Priority Replace Dscp 1 1 Permit Packet Content mask 0x00000000 mask Ox00000000 mask 0x00000000 31
262. objects accessible to the SNMP community To configure SNMP Community entries open the SNMP Manager folder and click the SNMP Community Table link which will open the following screen Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 153 SNMP Community Table Configuration Community Name View Name Access Right Feed Only Total Entries 2 Note Maximum of 10 entries SNMP Community Table Community Name View Name Access Right Delete The following parameters can be set Parameter Figure 8 8 SNMP Community Table Configuration and Table window Description Community Name View Name Access Right Type an alphanumeric string of up to 33 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch The view name must exist in the SNMP View Table Read Only Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Read Write Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can read from and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch To implement the new settings click Apply To delete an entr
263. on of RIP packets Authentication Toggle between Disabled and Enabled to specify that routers on the network should us the Password above to authenticate router table exchanges Password A password to be used to authenticate communication between routers on the network State Toggle between Disabled and Enabled to disable or enable this RIP interface on the switch Interface Metric A read only field that denotes the Metric value of the current IP Interface setting Click Apply to implement changes made OSPF The Open Shortest Path First OSPF routing protocol uses a link state algorithm to determine routes to network destinations A link is an interface on router and the state is a description of that interface and its relationship to neighboring routers The state contains information such as the IP address subnet mask type of network the interface is attached to other routers attached to the network etc The collection of link states is then collected in a link state database that is maintained by routers running OSPF OSPF specifies how routers will communicate to maintain their link state database and defines several concepts about the topology of networks that use OSPF To limit the extent of link state update traffic between routers OSPF defines the concept of Area All routers within an area share the exact same link state database and a change to this database on one router triggers an update to the link state datab
264. oning feet on the bottom at each corner of the device Allow enough ventilation space between the Switch and any other objects in the vicinity Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Figure 2 Prepare Switch for installation on a desktop or shelf 2 4 Installing the Switch in a Rack The Switch can be mounted in a standard 19 rack Use the following diagrams to guide you Fasten the mounting brackets to the Switch using the screws provided With the brackets attached securely you can mount the Switch a standard rack as shown in Figure 2 2 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 2 5 Mounting the Switch in a Standard 19 Rack cooooo oooooooco Figure 2 2 Installing Switch in a rack 2 5 Power On Plug one end of the AC power cord into the power connector of the Switch and the other end into the local power source outlet After the Switch is powered the LED indicators will momentarily blink This blinking of the LED indicators represents a reset of the system 2 6 Power Failure As a precaution in the event of a power failure unplug the Switch When power is resumed plug the Switch back in 2 7 External Redundant Power System The Switch supports an external redundant power system RPS connector Figure 2 3 The AT 9724TS with the AT RPS7000 Redundant External Power Supply Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density
265. optic ports can operate at 000Mbps in full duplex mode only Connections to the Gigabit Ethernet ports are made using fibre optic cable or Category 5e copper cable depending on the type of port A valid connection is indicated when the Link LED is lit 3 4 Stacking and the AT 9724TS The AT 9724TS is equipped with two 1 0 gigabit stacking ports at the rear of the Switch as seen in Figure 3 5 These stacking ports may be used to stack the AT 9724TS to a master switch to be used in a switch stack Figure 3 5 SIO and SIO 2 Stacking ports at the rear of the AT 9724TS These two stacking ports named SIO and SIO 2 can be used with other stacking switches for a scalable stacking solution of up to 288 ports in a ring topology These two stacking ports have corresponding LEDs at the front of the Switch labelled SIO and SIO 2 will light solid green whenever the corresponding port is in use itSwitth m m 21 23 50 Stack ID m m 2n m m Figure 3 6 Stacking LEDs SIO at the front of the AT 9724TS Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 18 Redundant Power Supply Redundant Power Supply Redundant Power Supply Redundant Power Supply Figure 3 8 Stacking in a Ring Architecture ar Note The Do not connect the stacked Switch group to the network until you have properly configured all Switches for stacking An
266. or COM port 2 Set the data rate to 115200 baud Set the data format to 8 data bits stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none Under Properties select VT 100 for Emulation mode 99 a gv um 59 Select Terminal keys for Function Arrow and Ctrl keys Ensure that you select Terminal keys not Windows keys E Note When you use HyperTerminal with the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system ensure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 allows you to use arrow keys in HyperTerminal s VT 100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 20 10 13 After you have correctly set up the terminal plug the power cable into the power receptacle on the back of the Switch The boot sequence appears in the terminal After the boot sequence completes the console login screen displays If you have not logged into the command line interface CLI program press the Enter key at the User name and password prompts There is one default user name and password for the Switch User names and passwords must first be created by the administrator If you have previously set up user accounts log in and continue to configure the Switch Enter the commands to complete your desired tasks Many commands require administrator level access privileges Read the next section for mo
267. ord New Password Confirm New Password Access Right Show All User Account Entnes Figure 7 4 User Account Modify Table Modify Modify or delete an existing user account the User Account Modify Table To delete the user account click on the Delete button To change the password type in the New Password and retype it in the Confirm New Password entry field The level of privilege Admin or User can be viewed in the Access Right field Admin and User Privileges There are two levels of user privileges Admin and User Some menu selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User privileges The following table summarizes the Admin and User privileges Management Admin User Configuration Yes Read Only Network Monitoring Yes Read Only Community Strings and Trap Stations Yes Read Only Update Firmware and Configuration Files Yes No System Utilities Yes No Factory Reset Yes No User Account Management Add Update Delete User Accounts Yes No View User Accounts Yes No Table 7 1 Admin and User Privileges After establishing a User Account with Admin level privileges be sure to save the changes by opening the Maintenance folder opening the Save Changes window and clicking the Save Configuration button Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 7 3 Access Authentication Control The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS comman
268. orresponding IP address of the SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Click Apply to implement changes made u Note Tosetthe SSH User Authentication parameters on the Switch a User Account must be previously configured For more information on configuring local User Accounts on the Switch see the User Accounts section of this manual located in this section Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 148 Chapter 8 SNMP Manager SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this informa
269. ort the client is using to send requests to this server RoundTripTime The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server AccessRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions AccessRetrans The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server AccessAccepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessRejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessChallenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or known types are not included as malformed access responses Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 176 BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access
270. ou must select the type of link state RtrLink NetLink Summary ASSummary and ASExtLink in the LSDB Type field and then click Find Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 180 The following fields are displayed in the OSPF LSDB Table Parameter Description Area ID Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID This Area ID will then be used to search the table and display an entry if there is one LSDB Type Displays which one of eight types of link advertisements by which the current link was discovered by the Switch All Router link RTRLink Network link NETLink Summary link Summary Autonomous System link ASSummary Autonomous System external link ASExternal MCGLink Multicast Group and NSSA Not So Stubby Area Adv Router ID Displays the Advertising Router s ID Link State ID This field identifies the portion of the Internet environment that is being described by the advertisement The contents of this field depend on the advertisement s LS type LS Type LinkState ID The originating router s Router ID 2 The IP interface address of the network s Designated Router 3 The destination network s IP address 4 The Router ID of the described AS boundary router Cost Displays the cost of the table entry Sequence Displays a sequence number corresponding to number of times the current link has been advertised as changed Browse OSPF Neighbor Table This table can be found in the
271. ough the sending and receiving of Link State Acknowledgment packets Multiple link state advertisements can be acknowledged in a single Link State Acknowledgment packet Depending on the state of the sending interface and the source of the advertisements being acknowledged a Link State Acknowledgment packet is sent either to the multicast address AllSPFRouters to the multicast address AllDRouters or as a unicast packet The format of this packet is similar to that of the Data Description packet The body of both packets is simply a list of link state advertisement headers The format of the Link State Acknowledgment packet is shown below OSPF Link State Acknowledgement Packet Octets 0 2 3 4 Router ID Area ID Checksum Authentication Type Authentication Authentication Link State Advertisement Header Figure 6 105 Link State Acknowledge Packet Each acknowledged link state advertisement is described by its link state advertisement header It contains all the information required to uniquely identify both the advertisement and the advertisement s current instance Link State Advertisement Formats There are five distinct types of link state advertisements Each link state advertisement begins with a standard 20 byte link state advertisement header Succeeding sections then diagram the separate link state advertisement types Each link state advertisement describes a piece of the OSPF routing domain Every router originates a r
272. ouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated Notes About VLANs on the AT 9724TS No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLANs without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs The AT 9724TS supports IEEE 802 1 Q VLANs and Port Based VLANs The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 10 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that tag unaware The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1 Q VLAN named default The default VLAN has a VID The member ports of Port based VLANs may overlap if desired IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1 Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1 Q VLAN information out of the packet header Ingress port A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made Egress port port on a switch where packets are flowing out of the Switch either to another switch or to an end station and tagging decisions must be made IEEE
273. outer links advertisement In addition whenever the router is elected as the Designated Router it originates a network links advertisement Other types of link state advertisements may also be originated The flooding algorithm is reliable ensuring that all routers have the same collection of link state advertisements The collection of advertisements is called the link state or topological database From the link state database each router constructs a shortest path tree with itself as root This yields a routing table There are four types of link state advertisements each using a common link state header These are Router Links Advertisements e Network Links Advertisements e Summary Link Advertisements e Autonomous System Link Advertisements Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Link State Advertisement Header All link state advertisements begin with a common 20 byte header This header contains enough information to uniquely identify the advertisements Link State Type Link State ID and Advertising Router Multiple instances of the link state advertisement may exist in the routing domain at the same time It is then necessary to determine which instance is more recent This is accomplished by examining the link state age link state sequence number and link state checksum fields that are also contained in the link state advertisement header The format of the Link State Advertisement
274. p 123 123 123 123 where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch Su Note The Factory default IP address for the Switch is 10 0 0 1 Connect to 10 90 90 90 t9 Figure 5 Login Button This opens the management module s user authentication window as seen below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 25 5 3 Web based User Interface The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management screens allows you to view performance statistics and permits you to graphically monitor the system status Areas of the User Interface The figure below shows the user interface The user interface is divided into 3 distinct areas as described in the table 2192 e Q 9 Z 70 j we eM a me l LI JG ge w System Information Area 2 MU Amar 7 ches sena E homes Shore glove Mon jm ce soot t J moien meh fa lare rm 60 30 us Figure 5 2 Main Web Manager Screen Area Function Select the menu window to be displayed The folder icons can be opened to display the hyperlinked menu buttons and subfolders contained within them Click the Allied Telesyn logo to go to the Allied Telesyn website 2 Presents a graphical near real time image of the front panel of the Switch This area displays the Switch s ports and expansion modules showing port activity dupl
275. peed and should be configured as full duplex The Master Port of the group is to be configured by the user and all configuration options including the VLAN configuration that can be applied to the Master Port are applied to the entire link aggregation group Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group and a link failure within the group causes the network traffic to be directed to the remaining links in the group The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat a link aggregation group as a single link on the switch level On the port level the STP will use the port parameters of the Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of the link aggregation group If two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on the Switch STP will block one entire group in the same way STP will block a single port that has a redundant link To configure port trunking click on the Link Aggregation hyperlink in the Configuration folder to bring up the Port Link Aggregation Group table Current Link Aggregation Group Entries Group Name State Delete Figure 6 9 Current Link Aggregation Group Entries window To configure port trunk groups click the Add button to add a new trunk group and use the Link Aggregation Settings menu see example below to set up trunk groups To modify a port trunk group click the hyperlinked group number corresponding to the entry you wish to alter To delete a port trun
276. permanently click on the Save button in the Save Changes page as shown below Save Settings Save system settings to NV RAM SavetOnly save config Save Log Only save Save All Save config and log Seve ee Figure 10 8 Save Changes Screen The Switch has three levels of save which are as follows Parameter Description Save Only save config Clicking the radio button for this entry will save only the current switch configuration to NV RAM Save Log Only save log Clicking the radio button for this entry will save only the current current log file to NV RAM Save All Save config and log Clicking the radio button for this entry will save both the current switch configuration and the current log file to NV RAM These settings will be used every time the Switch is rebooted See the Reset section for more information on changing configurations saved to NV RAM 10 6 Reset The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch Some of the current configuration parameters can be retained while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults a Note Only the Reset System option will enter the factory default parameters into the Switch s non volatile RAM and then restart the Switch All other options enter the factory defaults into the current configuration but do not save this configuration Reset System will return the Switch s configuration to the state it was when it left
277. phic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port Broadcast Int Time Interea 13 Record Number 200 AppN EhowHide F Unicast M Mulicast M Broadcast Figure 9 5 Rx Packets Analysis window line graph for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets To view the UMB Cast Table click the View Table link which will show the following table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 159 Unit 1 Port Port 1 Bytes Unicast Muticast 2 MacRae Bytes 179604 2 Figure 9 6 Rx Packets Analysis window table for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval Record Number Unicast Multicast Broadcast Show Hide Clear View Table View Line Select the desired setting between Is and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Check whether or not to display Multicast
278. ply to the Switch Otherwise it will remain dark Port LEDs row of LEDs for each port is located above the ports the front panel The first LED is for the top port and the second one is for the bottom ports A solid light denotes activity on the port while a blinking light indicates a valid link These LEDs will remain dark if there is no link activity on the port Stacking Ports SIO There are two LEDs in the front of the Switch marked SIO and they relate to the two l0 gigabit stacking ports at the rear of the Switch These LEDs are marked and 2 and will light solid green to denote activity on the port while a blinking light will indicate a valid link Stack ID These two seven segment LEDs display the current switch stack order of the Switch while in use Possible numbers to be displayed range from 1 12 in use 1 6 Rear Panel Components The rear panel of the Switch contains an AC power connector two 0 gigabit stacking ports and a redundant power supply connector Figure 1 4 Rear panel view of the Switch The AC power connector is a standard three pronged connector that supports the power cord Plug in the female connector of the provided power cord into this socket and the male side of the cord into a power outlet The Switch automatically adjusts its power setting to any supply voltage in the range from 100 240 VAC at 50 60 H
279. r SSL gt Download Certificate Download Certificate Certificate Type Server IP Certificate File Name Key File Name Current Certificate Certificate Loaded Figure 7 21 Download Certificate window To download certificates set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Certificate Type Server IP Certificate File Name Key File Name Enter the type of certificate to be downloaded This type refers to the server responsible for issuing certificates This field has been limited to local for this firmware release Enter the IP address of the TFTP server where the certificate files are located Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c cert der Enter the path and the filename of the key file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c pkey der Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 143 Configuration This screen will allow the user to enable SSL on the Switch and implement any or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch A ciphersuite is security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The Switch possesses four possible ciphersuites for the SSL function which are all enabled by default To utilize a particular ciphersuite dis
280. r Virtual link endpoint E bit When set the router is an Autonomous System AS boundary router E is for External B bit When set the router is an area border router B is for Border Number of Links The number of router links described by this advertisement This must be the total collection of router links to the area The following fields are used to describe each router link Each router link is typed The Type field indicates the kind of link being described It may be a link to a transit network to another router or to a stub network The values of all the other fields describing a router link depend on the link s Type For example each link has an associated 32 bit data field For links to stub networks this field specifies the network s IP address mask For other link types the Link Data specifies the router s associated IP interface address Field Description Type A quick classification of the router link One of the following Type Description Point to point connection to another router Connection to a transit network Connection to a stub network Virtual link Link ID Identifies the object that this router link connects to Value depends on the link s Type When connecting to an object that also originates a link state advertisement i e another router or a transit network the Link ID is equal to the neighboring advertisement s Link State ID This provides the key for looking up an advertisement the link state dat
281. r of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Coll An estimate of the total number of collisions on this network segment Show Hide Check whether or not to display ExDefer LateColl ExColl SingColl and Coll errors Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 9 5 Size The Web Manager allows packets received by the Switch arranged in six groups and classed by size to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Two windows are offered To select a port to view these statistics for first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch and or switch stack at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port 1 sj Pons Apply Deen View Table Time intera be we Record Number 200 Appi EhowHide W 64 85 127 F 128 255 155 511 M 512 1023 F 10241518 Figure 9 13 Rx Size Analysis window line graph To view the Packet Size Analysis Table click the link View Table which will show the following table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 165 View
282. r will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Banyan Virtual Integrated Network Service VINES Protocol ipV6 Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol This packet header information is defined by the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Protocol userDefined Using this parameter will instruct the Switch to forward packets to this VLAN if the tag in the packet header is concurrent with this protocol defined by the user This packet header information is defined by entering the following information Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 6l Port Settings Tag None Egress Forbidden User Defined Pid Specifies that the VLAN will only accept packets with this hexadecimal 802 10 Ethernet type value in the packet header The user may define an entry in the hexadecimal form ffff to define the packet identification The user only need enter the final four integers of the hexadecimal format to define the packet ID hex 0x0 Oxffff This field is only operable if userDefined is selected in the Protocol ID field encap ethernet llc snap all Specifies that the Switch will examine the octet of the packet header referring to one of the protocols listed Ethe
283. rameter Figure 6 13 Current and New MAC Notification Global Settings window Description State Interval sec History size Enable or disable MAC notification globally on the Switch The default setting is Disabled The user may set the time between and 2 147 483 647 seconds between MAC notifications The default setting is second The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification Up to 500 entries can be specified The default setting is Current MAC notification configurations can be viewed in the Current MAC Notification Global Settings window as seen above Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 37 MAC Notification Port Settings To change MAC notification settings for a port or group of ports on the Switch click Port Settings in the MAC Notification folder which will display the following screen MAC Notification Port Settings Unit Frum Ta State Apply Ma a Disabled Apply MAC Notification Port State Table Unit 1 Port State 1 Disabled Dasabled 4 Dusled 5 Disabled amp Disabled Disabled 8 Disabled Disabled 10 Disabled 11 Disabled 12 Disabled 13 Disabled 4 Disabled 15 Disabled 16 Disabled 17 Disabled 18 Draabled 19 Drabled 20 Disabled 21 Disabled 22 Disabled 233 Disabled 24 Disabled Figure 6 14 MAC Notification Port Settings and Port State Table The following p
284. rates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment SNMP management can be customized to suit the needs of the networks and the preferences of the network administrator Use the SNMP V3 menus to select the SNMP version used for specific tasks The AT 9724TS supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 2c and 3 The administrator can specify the SNMP version used to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device SNMP settings are configured using the menus located on the SNMP V3 folder of the web manager Workstations on the network that are allowed SNMP privileged access to the Switch can be restricted with the Management Station IP Address menu SNMP User Table The SNMP User Table displays all of the SNMP User s currently configured on the Switch In the SNMP Manager folder click on the SNMP User Table link This will open the SNMP User Table as shown below Add Total Entries 1 Note Maximum of 10 entries SNMP User Table User Name Group Name SNMP Version Delete Figure 8 1 SNMP User Table To delete an existing SNMP User Table entry click the X below the Delete heading corresponding to the entry you wish to delete Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 149 To display the detailed entry for a given user click on the hyperlinked User Name
285. rd between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters Checking the corresponding box will enable encryption for SNMP V3 and is only operable in SNMP V3 mode To implement changes made click Apply To return to the SNMP User Table click the Show All SNMP User Table Entries link SNMP View Table The SNMP View Table is used to assign views to community strings that define which MIB objects be accessed by a remote SNMP manager To view the SNMP View Table open the SNMP Manager folder and click the SNMP View Table entry The following screen should appear Add Total Entries 8 Note Maximum of 30 entries ISNMP View Table View Name restricted restricted restricted restricted restricted Community View fi Included Community View h 351 63 Excluded Community View Subtree View Type Delete Inchaded Included 1 36 1 63 102 1 Included 361631121 Included 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 Included X x x x x x x 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 Included Figure 8 4 SNMP View Table To delete an existing SNMP View Table entry click the X in the Delete column corresponding to the entry you wish to delete create a new entry click the Add button and a separate menu will appear Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 151 SNMP View Table Configuration View Name Subtree OLD View Type incuded gt Show SNMP View Table Entries Figure 8 5 SNMP View T
286. rded to other subnetworks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast querier for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below IGMP State Transitions Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Start Timer Count Becomes Zero Delaying L Member eave Group Another Host Responds Stop Timer Query Received Start Timer Timer Expires Send Response Figure 6 16 IGMP State Transitions Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 39 IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping allows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent between network stations or devices and an IGMP host When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific device based on IGMP messages passing through the Switch In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch see Advanced Settings You may then fine tune the settings for each VLAN using the IGMP Snooping link in the Configuration folder When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific Multicast group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa The Switch monitors IGMP messages and discontinues
287. re information on setting up user accounts See the AT 9724TS Command Line Interface Reference Manual on the documentation CD for a list of all commands and additional information on using the CLI When you have completed your tasks exit the session with the logout command or close the emulator program Make sure the terminal or PC you are using to make this connection is configured to match these settings If you are having problems making this connection on a PC make sure the emulation is set to VT 100 You will be able to set the emulation by clicking on the File menu in you HyperTerminal window clicking on Properties in the drop down menu and then clicking the Settings tab This is where you will find the Emulation options If you still do not see anything try rebooting the Switch by disconnecting its power supply Once connected to the console the screen below will appear on your console screen This is where the user will enter commands to perform all the available management functions The Switch will prompt the user to enter a user name and a password Upon the initial connection there is no user name or password and therefore just press enter twice to access the command line interface 4 6 First Time Connecting to the Switch The Switch supports user based security that can allow you to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the Switch or changing its settings This section tells how to log onto the Switch fix fi Note The pas
288. reports or implement IGMP snooping a multicast router connected to the router port of a Layer 3 switch would not be able to receive UDP data streams unless the UDP multicast packets were all forwarded to the router port A router port will be dynamically configured when IGMP query packets RIPv2 multicast DVMRP multicast or PIM DM multicast packets are detected flowing into a port Open the IGMP folder and the click on the Static Router Ports Entry link to open the Current Static Router Ports Entries page as shown below Current Static Router Ports Entries VLAN ID VLAN Name Modify Figure 6 19 Current Static Router Ports Entries window The Current Static Router Ports Entries page shown above displays all of the current entries to the Switch s static router port table To modify an entry click the Modify button This will open the Static Router Ports Settings page as shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 41 VID VLAN Name Slot Member Ports Apply Figure 6 20 Static Router Ports Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description VID VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN where the multicast router is attached VLAN Name This is the name of the VLAN where the multicast router is attached Unit
289. responding priority classes of service listed in the window above Priority classes of service that have a 0 in the Max Packet field will forward packets with strict priority scheduling The remaining classes of service that do not have a 0 in their Max Packet field will follow a weighted round robin WRR method of forwarding packets as long as the priority classes of service with a 0 in their Max Packet field are empty When a packet arrives in a priority class with a 0 in its Max Packet field this class of service will automatically begin forwarding packets until it is empty Once a priority class of service with a 0 in its Max Packet field is empty the remaining priority classes of service will reset the weighted round robin WRR cycle of forwarding packets starting with the highest available priority class of service Priority classes of service with an equal level of priority and equal entries in their Max Packet field will empty their fields based on hardware priority scheduling The Max Packet parameter allows you to specify the maximum number of packets a given priority class of service can transmit per weighted round robin WRR scheduling cycle This provides for a controllable CoS behavior while allowing other classes to empty as well value between 0 and 15 packets be specified per priority class of service to create the combination queue The example window below displays an example of the combination queue where Class will have a
290. resses for each subnet can be chosen as an IP address for an IP interface on the switch For this example we have chosen the next IP address above the network address for the IP interface s IP Address Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 93 VLAN Name VID Network Number IP Address System default 10 32 0 0 10 32 0 1 Engineer 2 10 64 0 0 10 64 0 1 Marketing 3 10 96 0 0 10 96 0 1 Finance 4 10 128 0 0 10 128 0 1 Sales 5 10 160 0 0 10 160 0 1 Backbone 6 10 192 0 0 10 192 0 1 Table 6 6 VLAN Example Assigned Interfaces The 6 IP interfaces each with an IP address listed in the table above and a subnet mask of 255 224 0 0 can be entered into the Setup IP Interface window To setup IP Interfaces on the Switch Go to the Configuration folder and click on the Layer 3 IP Networking folder and then click on the IP Interfaces Table link to open the following dialog box interface Table Interface Name IP Address Subnet Mask VLAN Name Secondary Active Delete 10 53 13 126 255000 default Enabled Figure 6 85 Interface Table window To setup a new IP interface click the Add button edit an existing IP Interface entry click on entry under the Interface Name heading Both actions will result in the same screen to configure as shown below IP Interface Configuration Add Interface Name E IP Address booo Subnet Mask 00 VLAN Name
291. retained Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 55 IEEE 802 1 Tag Octets N A Destination Address 6 Octets Source Address 6 Octets Ether Type 0x8100 Tag Control Information N Length Type Beginning of Data N N Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 Octets N N N User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits bit 12 bits Figure 6 38 IEEE 802 1 Tag The EtherType and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original EtherType Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE 802 1 Tag Length EType Old CRC Original Ethernet Packet S M M M M M M M F CS 2 Ee M M Priority l VLAN ID Figure 6 39 Adding an IEEE 802 10 Tag Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 56 Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 10 VID information can be transmitted from one 802 10 compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1 Q VLANs to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 10 compliant Unfortunately not all network devices are 802 1 Q compliant These devices are referred to as tag unaware 802 10 devices are referred to as tag aware
292. rmation from the Autonomous System Border Router in order for routers in the network to get and maintain routes to other Autonomous Systems Network link state updates are generated by a router elected as the Designated Router on a multi access segment with more than one attached router These updates describe all of the routers on the segment and their network connections External link state updates carry routing information to networks outside the Autonomous System The Autonomous System Border Router is responsible for generating and distributing these updates Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 105 OSPF Authentication OSPF packets can be authenticated as coming from trusted routers by the use of predefined passwords The default for routers is to use not authentication There are two other authentication methods simple password authentication key and Message Digest authentication MD 5 Message Digest Authentication MD 5 MD 5 authentication is a cryptographic method A key and a key ID are configured on each router The router then uses an algorithm to generate a mathematical message digest that is derived from the OSPF packet the key and the key ID This message digest a number is then appended to the packet The key is not exchanged over the wire and a non decreasing sequence number is included to prevent replay attacks Simple Password Authentication A password or key can b
293. rnet LLC or SNAP looking for a match of the hexadecimal value previously entered all will instruct the Switch to examine the total packet header After a match is found the Switch will forward the packet to this VLAN This field is only operable if userDefined is selected in the Protocol ID field Allows an individual port to be specified as member of aVLAN Specifies the port as either 802 1Q tagging or 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will designate the port as Tagged Allows an individual port to be specified as a non VLAN member Select this to specify the port as a static member of the VLAN Egress member ports are ports that will be transmitting traffic for the VLAN These ports be either tagged or untagged Select this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Click Apply to implement changes made Click the Show All Static VLAN Entries link to return to the Current 802 1Q Static VLAN Entries window GVRP Setting In the Configuration menu open the VLANs folder and click GVRP Setting The 802 1Q Port Settings dialog box shown below allows you to determine whether the Switch will share its VLAN configuration information with other GARPVLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enabled switches In addition Ingress Checking can be used to limit traffic by filtering incoming packets whose PVID does not match the PVID of the port Resu
294. rrent parameters set for the MSTI Instance STP Instance Operational Status Designated Root Bridge 4096 00 01 27 32 26 95 External Root Cost 200004 Regional Root Bridge 32768 00 53 13 1 33 24 Internal Root Cost 0 Designated Bridge 32768 00 50 ba 71 20 46 Root Port ud 1 Max Age 20 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 177 Changes Count 157 Figure 6 3I STP Instance Operational Status CIST Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 49 STP Instance Operational Status Regional Root Bridge 32770 00 53 13 1 33 24 Internal Root Cost 0 Designated Bridge 32770 00 53 13 1 33 24 Root Port None Remaining Hops 2 Last Topology Change 28 Topology Changes Count 3 Show STP Instance Table Parameter Figure 6 32 STP Instance Operational Status Previously Configured MSTI The following parameters may be viewed in the STP Instance Operational Status windows Description Designated Root Bridge External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Max Age Forward Delay Last Topology Change Topology Changes Count This field will show the priority and MAC address of the Root Bridge This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is O auto 0 aut
295. rsion is defined RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 38 The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 l6 3l Group Address all zeros if this is a query Figure 6 15 IGMP Message Format The IGMP Type codes are shown below Type Meaning Ox I Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Ox I Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present 0x16 Membership Report version 2 0 17 Leave a Group version 2 0 12 Membership Report version 1 Table 6 Type Codes IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective subnetworks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their subnetworks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to so that the queries will not be forwa
296. rt Description Table window Use the From and To pull down menu to choose a port or range of ports to describe and Unit to choose the Switch in the switch stack and then enter a description of the port s Click Apply to set the descriptions in the Port Description Table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 6 6 Port Mirroring The Switch allows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port You can attach a monitoring device to the mirrored port such as a sniffer or an RMON probe to view details about the packets passing through the first port This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting purposes To view the Setup Port Mirroring window click Port Mirroring in the Configuration folder Target Port Status Source Port Port Number None ingress P gress Hoth pply Rote 71 Source Port and will be invabd To configure a mirror port Setup Port Mirroring Note 2 The target port should be a non trunked port Deel Pott 2 Disabled D Target Port should be diferent or the setup Figure 6 7 Setup Port Mirroring window Select the Source Port from where you want to copy frames and the Target Port which receives the copies from the source port Select the Source Direction Ingress Egress or Both and change the Status drop down menu to Enabled Cli
297. rt configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D Browse Router Port VLAN ID VLAN Name Ports 112131415 161718 9 10111 112 13 114 15 16 17118 19 20 21 22 23124 25 4 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Figure 9 21 Browse Router Port window 9 11 Port Access Control The following screens used to monitor 802 statistics of the Switch on a per port basis view the Port Access Control screens open the monitoring folder and click the Port Access Control folder There are six screens to monitor eu Note 802 1 must be enabled under Configuration gt Advanced Settings Authenticator State The following section describes the 802 X Status on the Switch view the Authenticator State click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt Authenticator State W r ot Vent Figure 9 22 Authenticator State window Port Based 802 1 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 171 Show Authenticator State of Unit 1 Port SS EI co Figure 9 23 Authenticator State MAC Based 802 1X This window displays the Authenticator State for individual ports on a selected device To select unit within the switch stac
298. rt number on that switch separated by a colon Then the highest switch number and the highest port number of the range also separated by a colon are specified The beginning and end of the port list range are separated a dash For example 1 3 specifies switch number I port 3 2 4 specifies switch number 2 port 4 1 3 2 4 specifies all of the ports between switch l port 3 and switch 2 port 4 sin numerical order Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch Click Apply to implement changes made To establish the rule for a previously created Access Profile In the Configuration folder click the Access Profile Table link opening the Access Profile Table Under the heading Access Rule clicking Modify will open the following window Add Access Rule Table Profile ID Mode Type Access ID Display Delete cess Profile Entries Figure 6 64 Access Rule Table window IP To create new rule set for an access profile click the Add button A new window is displayed remove a previously created rule click the corresponding X button Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 79 Access Rule Configuration Profile ID 2 Mode Permit Deny Access ID IP p replace pnonty Replace Dscp 0 63 VLAN Name Source IP Destination IP Dscp 0 63 Protocol Protocol id user define 00000001 show All Access Rule Entnes Figure 6 65
299. ry containing the name the type of answer required and a code specifying whether the domain name system should do the entire name translation or simply return the address of the next DNS server if the server receiving the query cannot resolve the name When a DNS server receives a query it checks to see if the name is in its sub domain If it is the server translates the name and appends the answer to the query and sends it back to the client If the DNS server cannot translate the name it determines what type of name resolution the client requested complete translation is called recursive resolution and requires the server to contact other DNS servers until the name is resolved Iterative resolution specifies that if the DNS server cannot supply an answer it returns the address of the next DNS server the client should contact Each client must be able to contact at least one DNS server and each DNS server must be able to contact at least one root server The address of the machine that supplies domain name service is often supplied by a DHCP or BOOTP server or can be entered manually and configured into the operating system at startup Configuring DNS Relay Information To configure the DNS function on the Switch open the Configuration folder and click the DNS Relay folder In this folder click the DNS Relay Information link to open the following window DNS Global Se 8 DNS Relay Status Disabled Primary Name Server 0 0 0 0 Second
300. s ForceAuth Success Force Auth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success ForceAuth Success Figure 6 81 Reauthenticate Port and Reauthenticate Port Table window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 90 This window displays the following information Parameter Description Unit Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified Port The port number of the reauthenticated port Auth State The Authenticator State will display one of the following Initialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth ForceUnauth and N A BackendState The Backend State will display one of the following Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize and N A OpenDir Operational Controlled Directions are both and in PortStatus The status of the controlled port can be Authorized Unauthorized or N A oo Note user must first globally enable 802 1 in the Advanced Settings window in the Configuration folder before reauthenticating ports Information in the Reauthenticate Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1 X Reauthenticate Port s for MAC Based 802 1 To reauthenticate ports for the MAC side of 802 Ix the user must first enable 802 1 by MAC address the Advanced Settings window Click Port Access Entity gt PAE Syst
301. s and the next most reliable path is Static due to the fact that its has the next lowest value To set a higher reliability for a route change its value to a number less than the value of a route preference that has a greater reliability value using the New Route Preference Settings window command For example if the user wishes to make RIP the most reliable route the user can change its value to one that is less than the lowest value Static 60 or the user could change the other route values to more than 100 The user should be aware of three points before configuring the route preference l No two route preference values can be the same Entering the same route preference may cause the switch to crash due to indecision by the switch 2 If the user is not fully aware of all the features and functions of the routing protocols on the switch a change in the default route preference value may cause routing loops or black holes Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 98 3 After changing the route preference value for a specific routing protocol that protocol needs to be restarted because the previously learned routes have been dropped from the Switch The Switch must learn the routes again before the new settings can take effect To view the Route Preference Settings window click Configuration gt Layer 3 IP Networking gt Route Preference Settings Current Route Preference Settings iwi ee a ter ene
302. s that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server i e aFail becomes TRUE causing a transition from RESPONSE to FAIL Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server RADIUS Authentication This table contains information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authentication client on the client side of the RADIUS authentication protocol It has one row for each RADIUS authentication server that the client shares a secret with view the RADIUS Authentication click Monitoring gt Port Access Control RADIUS Authentication The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where s Figure 9 27 RADIUS Authentication window REI stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left hand corner The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Serverindex The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client shares a secret with InvalidServerAddr The number of RADIUS Access Response packets received from unknown addresses Identifier The NAS Identifier of the RADIUS authentication client This is not necessarily the same as sysName in MIB 1 AuthServerAddr The conceptual table listing the RADIUS authentication servers with which the client shares a secret ServerPortNumber The UDP p
303. s to other networks possibly using other routing protocols are called Autonomous System Border Routers ASBRs Link State Packets There are a number of different types of link state packets four of which are illustrated below Router Link State Updates These describe a router s links to destinations within area Summary Link State Updates Issued by Border Routers and describe links to networks outside the area but within the Autonomous System AS Network Link State Updates Issued by multi access areas that have more than one attached router One router is elected as the Designated Router DR and this router issues the network link state updates describing every router on the segment External Link State Updates Issued by an Autonomous System Border Router and describes routes to destinations outside the AS or a default route to the outside AS The format of these link state updates is described in more detail below Router link state updates are flooded to all routers in the current area These updates describe the destinations reachable through all of the router s interfaces Summary link state updates are generated by Border Routers to distribute routing information about other networks within the AS Normally all Summary link state updates are forwarded to the backbone area 0 and are then forwarded to all other areas in the network Border Routers also have the responsibility of distributing routing info
304. se To view the following window click Configuration gt Port Lock Entries Port Lock Entries Table VL AN VID MAC Address Unit Port Type default 00 00 80 cE 09 E9 default 00 01 39 10 00 Qb default 00 02 06 12 34 56 default 00 02 a5 9a 5 61 default 00 03 09 18 10 01 default 00 04 13 04 03 01 11 _ 11 Segred Permanent 1 1 1 1 default 00 05 Sd ed 84 ea 1 11 Secured Permanent 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 Secured Permanent 11 Secued Permanent 11 Secured Permanent 11 Secured Permanent default 00 06 01 01 01 00 default 00 08 02 54 0e 94 00 08 02 54 0f ce default 00 0c 6e 12 e1 1a default 00 0c 6e 1 9c aa default 00 0 6 35 90 default 00 0c 6e 45 5b f0 default 00 0c 8 20 90 01 1 11 Secured Permanent default O0 0c 8 3e e0 0d 1 11 Secured Permanent default 00 0c f8 42 c0 01 1 11 Secured Permanent 1 1 11 Permanent 11 Secued Permanent 11 Secured Permanent 11 Secured Permanent 11 Secured Permanent 11 Secured Permanent 11 Secured Permanent default 00 0 8 44 10 01 default 00 0e a6 01 45 6c default 00 0 11 7 5 11 Secured Permanent 11 Permanent wi 4 a 9 M ef mg wi 9 wg 11 Secured Permanent Next Figure 6 46 Port Lock Entries Table This fu
305. se the port to begin in the unauthorized state allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port The authentication process begins when the link state of the port transitions from down to up or when an EAPOL start frame is received The Switch then requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication server The default setting is Auto TxPeriod This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine This value determines the period of an EAP Request Identity packet transmitted to the client The default setting is 30 seconds QuietPeriod This allows you to set the number of seconds that the Switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the client The default setting is 60 seconds SuppTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the client The default setting is 30 seconds ServerTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the authentication server The default setting is 30 seconds MaxReq The maximum number of times that the Switch will retransmit an EAP Request to the client before it times out of the authentication sessions The default setting is 2 ReAuthPeriod A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic reauthentication of the client The default setting is 3600 seconds ReAuth
306. security features SNMPv3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network Security Level The Security Level settings only apply to SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthNoPriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthPriv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP Group Table click the Show All SNMP Group Table Entries link SNMP Community Table Configuration Use this table to create an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch s SNMP agent Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects will be accessible to the SNMP community Read write or read only level permission for the MIB
307. sk mask value 42 amp 3 Ken mask mask mask walue 64 79 mask mask Apply Figure 6 71 Access Rule Configuration Packet Content Mask To set the Access Rule for the Packet Content Mask adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Mode Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Access ID Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 50 Type Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Mask Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 83 Priority Offset This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1 default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the C
308. sly transmit and receive data It only works with connections to full duplex capable end stations and switches Connections to a hub must take place at half duplex Support broadcast storm filtering Non blocking store and forward switching scheme capability to support rate adaptation and protocol conversion Supports by port Egress Ingress rate control Efficient self learning and address recognition mechanism enables forwarding rate at wire speed Support port based enable and disable Address table Supports up to 8K addresses per device Supports a packet buffer of up to 3 Mbits Supports Port based VLAN Groups Port Trunking with flexible load distribution and fail over function IGMP Snooping support Layer 3 support including DVMRP OSPF and Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch SNMP support Secure Sockets Layer 551 and Secure Shell SSH support Port Mirroring support MIB support for RFCI213 MIB II RFC1493 Bridge RFCI757 RMON RFC1643 Ether like MIB RFC2233 Interface MIB IF MIB Private MIB RFC2674 for 802 1 IEEE 802 1x MIB RS 232 DCE console port for Switch management Provides parallel LED display for port status such as link act speed etc l 4 Ports Twenty four 24 1000T combo ports that may be used in uplinking various network devices to the Switch including PCs hubs and other switches to provide a gigabit Etherne
309. ssing or damaged please contact your local Allied Telesyn Reseller for replacement 2 2 Before You Connect to the Network The site where you install the Switch may greatly affect its performance Please follow these guidelines for setting up the Switch Install the Switch on a sturdy level surface that can support at least 6 6lb 3kg of weight Do not place heavy objects on the Switch The power outlet should be within 1 82 metres 6 feet of the Switch Visually inspect the power cord and see that it is fully secured to the AC power port Make sure that there is proper heat dissipation from and adequate ventilation around the Switch Leave at least 10 cm 4 inches of space at the front and rear of the Switch for ventilation Install the Switch in a fairly cool and dry place for the acceptable temperature and humidity operating ranges Install the Switch in a site free from strong electromagnetic field generators such as motors vibration dust and direct exposure to sunlight When installing the Switch on a level surface attach the rubber feet to the bottom of the device The rubber feet cushion the Switch protect the casing from scratches and prevent it from scratching other surfaces Ensure you program the Switch with a valid IP address see section xxxx 2 3 Installing the Switch without a Rack When installing the Switch on a desktop or shelf the rubber feet included with the Switch should first be attached Attach these cushi
310. stalleren overeenkomstig de lokale en nationale elektrische voorschriften Normes ce produit est conforme aux normes de suivantes DANGER DE FOUDRE DANGER NE PAS le mat riel ou les CABLES lors d activit orageuse 2 AN ATTENTION LE CORDON D ALIMENTATION SERT DE MISE HORS CIRCUIT POUR COUPER L ALIMENTATION DU MAT RIEL d brancher le cordon Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 193 3 QUIPEMENT DE CLASSE LECTRIQUE CE MAT RIEL DOIT ETRE MIS A LA TERRE La prise de courant doit tre branch e dans une prise femelle correctement mise la terre des tensions dangereuses risqueraient d atteindre les pi ces m talliques accessibles l utilisateur 4 A EQUIPEMENT POUR BRANCHEMENT ELECTRIQUE la prise de sortie doit tre plac e de l quipement et facilement accessible 5 ATTENTION Ne pas bloquer les fentes d a ration ceci emp cherait l air ambiant de circuler librement pour le refroidissement 6 A TEMP RATURE DE FONCTIONNEMENT Ce mat riel est capable de tol rer une temp rature ambiante maximum de ou 40 degr s Celsius gt POUR TOUS PAYS Installer le mat riel conform ment aux normes lectriques nationales et locales Standardit tuote on seuraavien standardien mukainen gt SALAMANISKUVAARA HENGENVAARA ALA TYOSKENTELE laitteiden tai KAAPELEIDEN KANSSA SALAMOIN NIN AIKANA HUOMAUTUS VIRTAJOHTOA KAYTETAAN VIRRAN
311. switch in a switch stack using that switch s Unit ID by using the pull down menu in the top left hand corner The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between 5 and 60s where 5 stands for seconds The default value is one second The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Port The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides Frames Rx The number of valid EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator Frames Tx The number of EAPOL frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Rx Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator TxReqid The number of EAP Req ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator RxLogOff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Tx Req The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Rx Respid The number of EAP Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx Resp The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx Error The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length Last Version L
312. swords used to access the Switch are case sensitive therefore S is not the same as s When you first connect to the Switch you will be presented with the first login screen shown below Note Press Ctrl R to refresh the screen This command be used at any time to force the console program in the Switch to refresh the console screen RT 9724TS 2 amp Port 10 100 1000 Stackable Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface irmware Build 1 05 F Copyright C 2004 2807 Allied Telesyn Inc All rights reserved UserName Figure 4 Initial screen first time connecting to the Switch The initial username and password are Username manager Password friend You will be given access to the command prompt AT 9724TS 4 shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 21 RI 972418 24 Port 10 100 1000 Stackable Ethernet Switch Comand Line Interface Firmware Build 1 05 Copyright C 2806 2007 Allied Telesyn Inc All rights reserved UserName manager Passord ensnsn RT 972418 4 Figure 4 2 Command Prompt u Note first user automatically gets Administrator level privileges It is recommended to create at least one Admin level user account for the Switch 4 7 Password Protection One of the first tasks when settings up the Switch is to create user accounts If you log in using a predefined administrator level user name you have privileged access to the Sw
313. t TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure authFail TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of a reauthentication request reAuthenticate TRUE Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 175 Authed Start Authed LogOff Responses AccessChallenges OtherReqToSupp NonNakRespFromSup Bac Auth Success Bac Auth Fail Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant Counts the number of t
314. t 514 or 6000 65535 Status Syslog server settings index 1 4 The IP address of the Syslog server This drop down menu allows you to select the level of messages that will be sent The options are Warning Informational and All Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the local use facilities or they may use the user level Facility Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following Bold font denotes the facility values that the Switch currently implements Numerical Code Facility 0 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 kernel messages user level messages mail system system daemons security authorization messages messages generated internally by syslog line printer subsystem network news subsystem UUCP subsystem clock daemon security authorization messages FTP daemon NTP subsystem log audit log alert clock daemon local use 0 local0 local use locall local use 2 local2 local use 3 local3 local use 4 local4 local use 5 local5 local use 6 6 local use 7 local7 Type the UDP port number used for sending Syslog messages The default is 514 Choose Enabled or Disabled to activate or deactivate To set the System Log Server configuration click Apply To delete an entry from the
315. t mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff dest port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex OxO0 Oxffff protocol id Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Specify the protocol ID mask in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffffffff Port The user may set the Access Profile Table on a per port basis by entering an entry in this field Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that switch separated by a colon Then the highest switch number and the highest port number of the range also separated by a colon are specified The beginning and end of the port list range are separated a dash For example 1 3 specifies switch number I port 3 2 4 specifies switch number 2 port 4 1 3 2 4 specifies all of the ports between switch l port 3 and switch 2 port 4 sin numerical order Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch The page shown below is the Packet Content Mask configuration window Access Profile Configuration Profile 1001 9 Figure 6 63 Access Profile Configuration window Packet Content Mask Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 78 This screen will aid the user in configuring the Switch to mask packet headers beginning wi
316. t or viewed Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 158 Parameter Description Time Interval Record Number Select the desired setting between 15 and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Bytes Counts the number of bytes received on the port Packets Counts the number of packets received on the port Unicast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Multicast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether to display Bytes and Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table UMB Cast RX Click the UMB Cast RX link in the Packets folder of the Monitoring menu to view the following graph of UMB cast packets received on the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for first select the Switch in the switch stack by using the Unit pull down menu and then select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time gra
317. t traffic on the Port is not subject to access control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to become Unauthorized Hence if the Port is actually connected to a shared media LAN segment with more than one attached device successfully authenticating one of the attached devices effectively provides access to the LAN for all devices on the shared segment Clearly the security offered in this situation is open to attack MAC Based Network Access Control L Uncontrolled Port EX Controlled Port port blocked AT 9724T5 Switch RADIUS PX lt B3 lt PX PSI PLE Server 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Figure 6 74 Example of Typical MAC Based Configuration In order to successfully make use of 802 1 in a shared media LAN segment it would be necessary to create logical Ports one for each attached device that required access to the LAN The Switch would regard the single physical Port connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct logical Ports each logical Port being independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state The Switch learns each attached devices individual MAC addresses and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then use to communicate with the LAN via the Switch Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 St
318. t up for TACACS authentication so must be the host server Policy amp Parameters This command will enable an administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When enabled the device will check the Login Method List and choose a technique for user authentication upon login To access the following window click Security Management gt Access Authentication Control gt Policy amp Parameters Policy amp Parameters Settings Authentication Policy Disabled D Response timeout 0 255 User attempts Figure 7 5 Policy amp Parameters Settings window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 135 The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Authentication Policy Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Authentication Policy on the Switch Response Timeout 0 255 This field will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user The user may set a time between 0 and 255 seconds The default setting is 30 seconds User Attempts 1 255 This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will be locked out of further authentication attempts Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds before another authentication attempt TELNET
319. t uplink in full duplex mode Four 4 high performance SFP ports for a fibre optic connection to various network connections for use over great distances Two l0 gigabit stacking ports at the rear of the Switch for stacking switches utilizing ring topology RS 232 DCE Diagnostic port console port for setting up and managing the Switch via a connection to a console terminal or PC using a terminal emulation program Installing the SFP ports The Switch is equipped with four SFP Small Form Factor Portable ports which are to be used with fibre optical transceiver cabling in order to uplink various other networking devices for a gigabit link that may span great distances Figure l l Inserting the fibre optic transceivers into the AT 9724TS 1 5 Front Panel Components The front panel of the Switch consists of LED indicators for Power Master Console RPS SIO stacking a seven segment Stack ID LED and for Link Act for each port the Switch as well as 24 1000 ports 4 SFP gigabit Ethernet ports and a RS 232 DCE console port for Switch management 9724 5 900 S StackID 9 Act in 8 20 2 2 F
320. t will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1 Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Ingress Filtering A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an ingress port If ingress filtering is enabled for a port the Switch will examine the VLAN information in the packet header if present and decide whether or not to forward the packet If the packet is tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will first determine if the ingress port itself is a member of the tagged VLAN If it is not the packet will be dropped If the ingress port is a member of the 802 1 Q VLAN the Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802 1 Q VLAN If it is not the packet is dropped If the destination port is a member of the 802 1 Q VLAN the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to its attached network segment If the packet is not tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will tag the packet with its own PVID as a VID if the port is a tagging port The switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the same VLAN has the same VID as the ingress port If it does not the packet is dropped If it has the same VID the pac
321. tallata vicino all apparecchio per risultare facilmente accessibile 5 A ATTENZIONE le prese d aria non vanno ostruite e devono consentire il libero ricircolo dell aria ambiente per il raffreddamento 6 TEMPERATURA DI FUNZIONAMENTO Questo prodotto concepito per una temperatura ambientale massima di 40 gradi centigradi 7 A TUTTI I PAESI installare il prodotto in conformit delle vigenti normative elettriche nazionali Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 194 Sikkerhetsnormer Dette produktet tilfredsstiller folgende sikkerhetsnormer P FARE FOR LYNNEDSLAG FARE ARBEID IKKE pa utstyr eller KABLER i TORDENV R FORSIKTIG STROMLEDNINGEN BRUKES TIL A FRAKOBLE UTSTYRET FOR A DEAKTIVISERE UTSTYRET m str mforsyningen kobles fra ELEKTRISK TYPE I KLASSE UTSTYR DETTE UTSTYRET JORDES Stromkontakten m v re tilkoplet en korrekt jordet kontakt En kontakt som ikke er korrekt jordet kan fore til farlig spenninger i lett t ilgjengelige metalldeler UTSTYR FOR STIKKONTAKT Stikkontakten skal monteres i n rheten av utstyret og skal vere lett tilgjengelig FORSIKTIG Lufteventilene ma ikke blokkeres og ma ha fri tilgang til luft med romtemperatur for avkjeling DRIFTSTEMPERATUR Dette produktet konstruert for bruk i maksimum romtemperatur 40 grader celsius ALLE LAND Produktet m installeres i samsvar med de lokale og nasjonale elektriske koder Padr
322. tch Sweden Allied Telesyn International Isafjordsgatan 22 B5tr 164 40 Kista Sweden Tel 46 0 8131414 Fax 46 0 87506004 United Kingdom Allied Telesyn International Ltd 100 Longwater Avenue GreenPark Reading RG2 6GP Tel 44 118 920 9800 Fax 44 118 975 2456 Latin America Support Office Allied Telesyn International 19800 North Creek Parkway Suite 200 Bothell WA 98011 USA Tel 1 425 481 3852 Fax 1 425 489 9191 Toll Free Mexico amp Puerto Rico 95 800 424 5012 ext 3852 Latin America Mexico Allied Telesyn International AN Insurgentes Sur 800 Piso 8 Col Del Valle M xico DF 03100 Tel 52 55 5448 4989 Fax 52 55 5448 4910 Portugal Allied Telesyn International Centro de Escrit rios das Laranjeiras Praca Nuno Rodrigues dos Santos N 7 Sala 211 1600 171 Lisbon Tel 351 21 721 74 00 Fax 351 21 727 91 26 Spain Allied Telesyn International S L U Plaza de Espa a 18 4 Ofic 3 28008 Madrid Tel 34 91 559 1055 34 91 559 2644 Allied Telesyn International Corp 19800 North Creek Parkway Suite 200 Bothell WA 9801 I Tel 1 425 487 8880 Fax 425 489 9191 For current information please visit our web site www alliedtelesyn com Tell Us What You Think If you have any comments or suggestions on how we might improve this or other Allied Telesyn documents please contact us at www alliedtelesyn com Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density La
323. tch To find a specific IP route enter an IP address into the Destination Address field along with a proper subnet mask into the Mask field and click Find Destination Address zm 0 0 0 0 Routing Table Address 10000 Total Entries 1 Interface Cost Protocol Netmask 255000 Gateway Figure 9 30 Browse Routing Table window Browse ARP Table The Browse ARP Table window may be found in the Monitoring menu in the Layer 3 Feature folder This window will show current ARP entries on the Switch search a specific ARP entry enter an interface name into the Interface Name or an IP address and click Find To clear the ARP Table click Clear All Interface Name IP Address 10 00 Find Clear All ARP Table Interface Name Address Mac Address System 10 0 0 0 BOB Local Broadcast System 10 0 0 1 00 04 23 5a 34 df Dynarrec System 10 0 0 121 00 a0 c5 15 3b 6e Dynamsc System 10 0 1 100 00 50 ba f4 96 9a System 10 0 25 1 00 40 59 9 2 4 Dynatrac System 10 0 34 1 00 0 14 13 Dynamsc System 100461 00 80 c8 91 15 eb Dynarrac System 10 0 51 1 00 80 c8 4c 69 fo System 10 0 58 4 00 0 43 13 Dynamac System 10 0 85 168 00 50 ba 11 08 e4 Dynarrac System 10 1 1 1 00 05 54 00 00 00 Dynatrac System 10 1 14 00 amp 7E 47 49 42 Dynamasc System 10 1 1 80 00 05 54 95 bf 9b Dynarrac System 10 1 1 101 00 50 ba 15 48 56 Dynatrac System 10
324. tch s default IP address is 10 0 0 1 You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config System ipaddress XXX XXX XXX XXX yyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Alternatively you can enter config ipif System ipaddress 2 Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch Advanced Settings The Advanc
325. th that particular host therefore speeding up the negotiation process The default setting is 600 seconds Ciphersuite RSA with RC4 128 MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 bit keys and the MDS Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default RSA with 3DES EDE CBC SHA This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default DHS DSS with 3DES EDE CBC SHA This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange and stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40 bit keys Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default Note Certain implementations concerning the function and configuration of SSL are not available on the web based management of this Switch and need to be configured using the command line interface For more information on SSL and its functions see the AT 9724TS Command Line Reference Manual located on the documentation CD of this product ot Note Enabling the SSL command will
326. th the offset value specified The following fields are used to configure the Packet Content Mask Parameter Description Profile ID 1 8 in a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 1 8 Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select IP to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header Offset This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified value 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 5th byte value 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 3l value 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 value 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 value 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 Port The user may set the Access Profile Table on a per port basis by entering an entry in this field Entering all will denote all ports on the Switch The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning po
327. the configuration file on the TFTP server Click Start to initiate the file transfer Upload Log To upload the Switch history log file to a TFTP server open the TFTP Service folder in the Maintenance folder and then click the Upload Log link Upload History Log Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 TI Name Figure 10 4 Upload Log window Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and the path and filename for the history log on the TFTP server Click Start to record the IP address of the TFTP server and to initiate the file transfer 10 2 Multiple Image Services The Multiple Image Services folder allow users of the AT 9724TS to configure and view information regarding firmware located on the Switch Switch allows two firmware images to be stored in its memory and either can be configured to be the boot up firmware for the Switch For information regarding firmware images located on the Switch open the Firmware Information link The default setting for the Switch s firmware will have the boot up firmware stored in Image but the user may set either firmware stored to be the boot up firmware by using the Config Firmware Image window Firmware Information The following screen allows the user to view information about current firmware images stored the Switch To access the following screen click Maintenance gt MULTIPLE IMAGE Services gt Firmware Information Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit E
328. the factory actory Reset to Default Value Reset Proceed with system reset except IP address log user account and stack mformation C Reset Config Proceed with system reset except stack information 6 Reset System Proceed with system reset reset all save reboot Apply Figure 10 9 Factory Reset to Default Value window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 188 10 7 Reboot Device The following menu is used to restart the Switch If you do not save the settings all changes made in this session will lost Do you want to save the settings Yes No Restart Figure 10 10 Restart System window Clicking the Yes click box will instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non volatile RAM before restarting the Switch Clicking the No click box instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch All of the configuration information entered from the last time Save Changes was executed will be lost Click the Restart button to restart the Switch 10 8 Logout Use the Logout page to logout of the Switch s Web based management agent by clicking on the Log Out button Logout Web Setups Are you sure you want to logout of WEB configs If yes just click the Log Out button and return to main page Log Out Figure 10 Logout window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackab
329. the features functions LEDs and ports on the Gigabit Switch Chapter 2 Installation describes how to install the switch Chapter 3 Connecting the Switch Chapter 4 Introduction to Switch Management basic management features connecting devices to the switch Chapter 5 Introduction to Web based Switch Management Chapter 6 Configuring the Switch including accessing switch information setting up network configurations Chapter 7 Management security features user accounts access authentication control Chapter 8 SNMP Manager description of features and brief introduction Chapter 9 Monitoring Chapter 10 Maintenance switch utility functions Appendix A Specifications provides Residential Gateway specifications Appendix B Translated Electrical Safety and Emission Information contains multi language translations of the cautions and warnings in this manual Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Document Conventions This guide uses several conventions that you should become familiar with before you begin to install the product 1 Bold font Typewriter Font Italics Menu Name gt Menu Option Note A note provides additional information Warning A warning indicates that performing or omitting a specific action may result in bodily injury Caution A caution indicates that performing or omitting a specific action may result in equipment damage or loss of data
330. the neighboring router Enter a Key ID of up to 5 characters to set the Auth Key ID for either the Simple Auth Type or the MD5 Auth Type as specified in the previous parameter This field allows the entry of a number between and 65 535 that is representative of the OSPF cost of reaching the selected OSPF interface The default metric is A read only field describing the Designated Router state of the IP interface This field many read DR if the interface is the designated router or Backup DR if the interface is the Backup Designated Router The highest IP address will be the Designated Router and is determined by the OSPF Hello Protocol of the Switch The IP address of the aforementioned Designated Router The IP address of the aforementioned Backup Designated Router A read only field that denotes the estimated time to transmit a Link State Update Packet over this interface in seconds A read only field that denotes the time between LSA retransmissions over this interface in seconds Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 119 OSPF Virtual Interface Settings Click the OSPF Virtual Interface Settings link to view the current OSPF Virtual Interface Settings There are not virtual interface settings configured by default so the first time this table is viewed there will be not interfaces listed To add a new OSPF virtual interface configuration set to the table click the Add button A new men
331. thernet Switch 185 Firmware Information BOX ID Version Update Time 1 1 1 06 3611379 2099 02 15 05 10 58 1000 2 W manager 1 2 means boot up firmware R means firmware update thru Serial Port R5232 T means firmware update thru TELNET S means firmware update thru SNMP means firmware update thru WEB Figure 0 5 Firmware Information window This window holds the following information Parameter Description BOX States the stacking ID number of the switch in the switch stack ID States the image ID number of the firmware in the Switch s memory Switch can store 2 firmware images for use Image ID will be the default boot up firmware for the Switch unless otherwise configured by the user Version States the firmware version Size States the size of the corresponding firmware in bytes Update Time States the specific time the firmware version was downloaded to the Switch From States the IP address of the origin of the firmware There are four ways firmware may be downloaded to the Switch R If the IP address has this letter attached to it it denotes a firmware upgrade through the Console Serial Port RS 232 T If the IP address has this letter attached to it it denotes a firmware upgrade through Telnet S If the IP address has this letter attached to it it denotes a firmware upgrade through the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP W If the IP address has this
332. thm to be used This Switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA specified here as the DHE DSS Diffie Hellman DHE public key algorithm This is the first authentication process between client and host as they exchange keys in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level 2 Encryption The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms Stream Ciphers There two types of stream ciphers on the Switch RC4 with 40 bit keys and RC4 with 28 bit keys These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use CBC Block Ciphers CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block The Switch supports the 3DES encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard DES to create the encrypted text 3 Hash Algorithm This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks The Switch supports two hash algorithms MD5 Mess
333. tic VLANs Modify The following fields can then be set in either the Add or Modify 802 10 Static VLANs menus Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 60 Parameter Unit VID VLAN ID VLAN Name Advertisement Type Protocol ID Description Choose the Switch ID number of the Switch in the switch stack to be modified Allows the entry of aVLAN ID in the Add dialog box or displays the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN in the Modify dialog box VLANSs can be identified by either the VID or the VLAN name Allows the entry of a name for the new VLAN in the Add dialog box or for editing the VLAN name in the Modify dialog box Enabling this function will allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources notifying that they may join the existing VLAN Displays the type of protocol associated with this VLAN The following parameters allow for the creation of protocol based VLANs The Switch supports 15 pre configured protocol based VLANs plus one user defined protocol based VLAN where the administrator may configure the settings for the appropriate protocol and forwarding of packets 16 total Selecting a specific protocol will indicate which protocol will be utilized in determining the VLAN ownership of a tagged packet Pre set protocol based VLANs on the switch include port Using this parameter will allow the creation of a normal 802 1 Q VLAN on the Switch ip Using th
334. tion entitled Management Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and Broadcast Multicast Storm Management and counter information are stored by the Switch the Management Information Base MIB The Switch uses the standard Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base The proprietary MIB may also be retrieved by specifying the MIB Object Identifier MIB values can be either read only or read write 4 9 IP Address Assignment Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example Switch s default IP address is 10 0 0 1 You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory This MAC address cannot be changed and can be found by enter
335. tion discusses the implementation of QoS Quality of Service and benefits of using 802 1 priority queuing The Advantages of QoS QoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802 standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving bandwidth for important functions that require a large bandwidth or have a high priority such as VoIP voice over Internet Protocol web browsing applications file server applications or video conferencing Not only can a larger bandwidth be created but other less critical traffic can be limited so excessive bandwidth can be saved The Switch has separate hardware queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to and in turn prioritized View the following map to see how the AT 9724TS implements 802 1P priority queuing How 802 1 works Switch default settings 7 priority queues Queues Priority Port Port default 0 0 0 l 4 2 ARN priority Figure 6 47 Mapping QoS on the Switch The picture above shows the default priority setting for the Switch Class 6 has the highest priority of the seven priority classes of service on the Switch In order to implement QoS the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag tagged Then the user may forward these tagged packets to designated classes of service on the Switch where they will be emptied based on priority For example
336. tion of routing loops RIP2 Message Format The message format used with RIP2 is an extension of the RIPI format RIP version 2 also adds a l6 bit route tag that is retained and sent with router updates can be used to identify the origin of the route Because the version number in RIP2 occupies the same octet as in RIPI both versions of the protocols can be used on a given router simultaneously without interference RIP Configuration Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 101 To setup RIP for the IP interfaces configured on the Switch the user must enable RIP and then configure RIP settings for the individual IP interfaces To globally enable RIP on the Switch open the Configuration folder to Layer 3 Networking and then open the RIP folder and click on the RIP Configuration link to access the following screen Figure 6 95 RIP Global Setting window RIP Global Settings To enable RIP simply use the pull down menu select Enabled and click Apply Setting Up RIP RIP settings are configured for each IP interface on the Switch Click the RIP Interface Settings link in the RIP folder menu appears in table form listing settings for IP interfaces currently on the Switch configure RIP settings for an individual interface click on the hyperlinked Interface Name To view the next page of RIP Interface Settings click the Next button Figure 6 96 RIP Interface Settings window
337. tion over the network AT 9724TS supports the SNMP versions 2c and 3 You can specify which version of the SNMP you want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v I and v 2 user authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP vl and v2 management access are public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNIMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMPvI while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting re
338. to add an Authentication Server Host Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the remote server host the user wishes to add Protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol XTACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol RADIUS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol Port 1 65535 Enter a number between and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a Timeout 1 255 Retransmit 1 255 Key server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the TACACS server does not respond Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS servers only Specify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters Click Apply to add the server host Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 138 Note th
339. to calculate the OSPF cost is as follows Cost 100 000 000 bandwidth in bps As an example the cost of a 10Mbps Ethernet line will be 10 and the cost to cross 1 544Mbps line will be 64 Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 103 Shortest Path Tree To build Router A s shortest path tree for the network diagrammed below Router is put at the root of the tree and the smallest cost link to each destination network is calculated Router A 128 213 0 0 Router D 222211400 128 213 0 0 Router C Figure 6 98 Constructing a Shortest Path Tree The diagram above shows the network from the viewpoint of Router A Router can reach 192 213 11 0 through Router B with a cost of 10 5 15 Router can reach 222 211 10 0 through Router C with a cost of 10 10 20 Router A can also reach 222 21 1 10 0 through Router B and Router D with a cost of 10 5 10 25 but the cost is higher than the route through Router C This higher cost route will not be included in the Router A s shortest path tree The resulting tree will look like this Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 104 128 213 0 0 Figure 6 99 Constructing a Shortest Path Tree Completed Note that this shortest path tree is only from the viewpoint of Router A The cost of the link from Router B to Router A for instance is not important to constructing Router A s short
340. to connect a device to the connectors on the SFP transceiver Caution When the SFP transceiver acquires a link the associated integrated 10 100 1000T port is disabled Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 24 Chapter 5 Introduction to Web based Switch Configuration 5 Introduction 5 2 Login to Web manager 5 3 Web Based User Interface 5 4 Basic Setup 5 5 Reboot 5 6 Basic Switch Setup 5 7 Network Management 5 8 Switch Utilities 5 9 Network Monitoring 5 10 IGMP Snooping Status 5 1 Introduction All software functions of the AT 9724TS can be managed configured and monitored via the embedded web based HTML interface The Switch can be managed from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Netscape Navigator Communicator or Microsoft Internet Explorer The browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol The Web based management module and the Console program and Telnet are different ways to access the same internal switching software and configure it Thus all settings encountered in web based management are the same as those found in the console program 5 2 Login to Web Manager To begin managing your Switch simply run the browser you have installed on your computer and point it to the IP address you have defined for the device The URL in the address bar should read something like htt
341. ts DD sequence numbers Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 109 OSPF Database Description Packet Octets eo N A 3 Version No Packet Length Router ID Area ID Checksum Authentication Type Authentication Authentication DD Sequence No Link State Advertisement Header Figure 6 102 Database Description Packet Field Description Options The optional capabilities supported by the router l bit The Initial bit When set to I this packet is the first in the sequence of Database Description packets M bit The More bit When set to this indicates that more Database Description packets will follow MS bit The Master Slave bit When set to this indicates that the router is the master during the Database Exchange process A zero indicates the opposite DD Sequence Number User to sequence the collection of Database Description Packets The initial value indicated by the Initial bit being set should be unique The DD sequence number then increments until the complete database description has been sent The rest of the packet consists of a list of the topological database s pieces Each link state advertisement in the database is described by its link state advertisement header Link State Request Packet Link State Request packets are OSPF packet type 3 After exchanging Database Description packets with a neighboring router a router may find that parts of
342. ts may be configured starting with the selected port Mode Active Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames This allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group that is to add or subtract ports from the group at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active Both devices must support LACP Passive LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot initially send LACP control frames In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically one end of the connection must have active LACP ports see above After setting the previous parameters click Apply to allow your changes to be implemented The LACP Port Table shows which ports are active and or passive 6 9 MAC Notification MAC Notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database MAC Notification Global Settings To globally set MAC notification on the Switch open the following screen by opening the MAC Notification folder and clicking the MAC Notification Global Settings link Current MAC Notification Global Settings State Interval 1 2147483647 sec History size 1 500 State Interval 1 2 147483647 sec History size 1 500 The following parameters may be modified Pa
343. tted to theVID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VIDs are different the Switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VIDs as the Switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Tagging and Untagging Every port on an 802 1 Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into and out of it If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices the network to make packet forwarding decisions Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1 Q tag from all packets that flow into and out of those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1 Q VLAN tag the por
344. u configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Enable Method Lists window in this section for more information Click Apply to implement changes made Authentication Server Group Settings This window will allow users to set up Authentication Server Groups on the Switch A server group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server group The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified Up to eight 8 authentication server hosts may be added to any particular group To view the following window click Security Management gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Group Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Note Maamum of 8 entries Authentication Server Group Settings Group Name radus x tacacs x tacacs x trinity Figure 7 7 Authentication Server Group Settings window This screen displays the Authentication Server Groups on the Switch The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified To modify a particular group cli
345. u appears see below To change an existing configuration click on the hyperlinked Transit Area ID for the set you want to change The menu to modify an existing set is the same as the menu used to add a new one To eliminate an existing configuration click the X in the Delete column OSPF Virtual Interface Settings Tr ansitlNeighbor Router IID ID if Hella Dead Auth Transrit ral Status Delet ED ie Type Delay RetransInterval Status Delete Figure 6 116 OSPF Virtual Interface Settings window The status of the virtual interface appears Up or Down in the Status column OSPF Virtual Link Setting Add Transit Area ID Neighbor Router ID Hello Interval 1 55535 Dead interval 1 565535 Auth Type PasswordlAuth Key ID Transmit Delay Apply show AB OSPF Virtual Link Er nes Figure 6 117 OSPF Virtual Link Setting Add Configure the following parameters if you are adding or changing an OSPF Virtual Interface Parameter Description Transit Area ID Neighbor Router Hello Interval 1 65535 Dead Interval 1 65535 Auth Type Password Auth Key ID Transmit Delay RetransInterval Allows the entry of an OSPF Area ID previously defined on the Switch that allows a remote area to communicate with the backbone area 0 A Transit Area cannot be a Stub Area or a Backbone Area The OSPF router ID for the remote router This is a 32 bit number in th
346. une messages from downstream routers to remove branches from the multicast delivery tree that do not contain multicast group members PIM DM has no explicit join messages It relies upon periodic flooding of multicast messages to all interfaces and then either waiting for a timer to expire the Join Prune Interval or for the downstream routers to transmit explicit prune messages indicating that there are no multicast members on their respective branches PIM DM then removes these branches prunes them from the multicast delivery tree Because a member of a pruned branch of a multicast delivery tree may want to join a multicast delivery group at some point in the future the protocol periodically removes the prune information from its database and floods multicast messages to all interfaces on that branch The interval for removing prune information is the Join Prune Interval PIM DM Configuration To enable PIM DM globally on the Switch go to Configuration gt IP Multicast Routing Protocol gt PIM gt PIM DM Configuration This will give the user access to the following screen PIM DM Global Settings PIM DM State Disabled D Apply Figure 6 135 PIM DM Global Settings window Use the pull down menu choose Enabled and click Apply to set the PIM DM function on the Switch Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch To view the PIM DM Table open the IP Multicasting
347. upports SNMP version 1 0 version 2 0 and version 3 0 The SNMP agent decodes the incoming SNMP messages and responds to requests with MIB objects stored in the database The SNMP agent updates the MIB objects to generate statistics and counters 4 4 Command Line Console Interface Through The Serial Port You can also connect a computer or terminal to the serial console port to access the Switch The command line driven interface provides complete access to all Switch management features 4 5 Connecting the Console Port RS 232 DCE The Switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring the Switch This port is a female DB 9 connector implemented as a data terminal equipment DTE connection To use the console port you need the following equipment terminal or computer with both serial port and the ability to emulate terminal A null modem or crossover RS 232 cable with female DB 9 connector for the console port on the Switch supplied with the switch To connect a terminal to the console port l Connect the female connector of the RS 232 cable directly to the console port on the Switch and tighten the captive retaining screws 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a terminal or to the serial connector of a computer running terminal emulation software Set the terminal emulation software as follows Select the appropriate serial port COM port
348. urce IP Address into the respective field and click che Find button The next hop of that DVMRP Routing entry will appear in the DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table below Neighbor Address o 0 0 0 Find DVMRP Neighbor Table Neighbor Address Generation ID Interface Name 10 20 6 24 1070379305 34 System 10 20 6 26 141 34 System 10 53 10 8 1014658134 34 Total Entries 3 Figure 9 39 DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table PIM Monitoring Multicast routers use Protocol Independent Multicast PIM to determine which other multicast routers should receive multicast packets To find out more information concerning PIM and its configuration on the Switch see the IP Multicasting chapter of Chapter 6 Configuration PIM Neighbor Address Table The PIM Neighbor Address Table contains information regarding each of a router s PIM neighbors This screen may be found in the Monitoring folder under the heading PIM Monitor To search this table enter either an Interface Name or Neighbor Address into the respective field and click the Find button PIM neighbors of that entry will appear in the PIM Neighbor Table below DUI NE Neighbor Address 0 0 0 0 Find PIM Neighbor Table Neighbor Address System 10 22 8 100 97 System 12 10 27 32 99 System 15 1 1 251 103 Total Entries 3 Figure 9 40 PIM Neighbor Table Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 183 Chapter 10 Switch
349. uthentication Control gt Enable Admin Enable Admin Click Enable Admin button will let user input the new password to upgrade this web management to Admin level the password is incorrect web management will stay at the login page and wait for user to logi again Enable Admin Figure 7 19 Enable Admin Screen When this screen appears click the Enable Admin button revealing a window for the user to enter authentication password username as seen below A successful entry will promote the user to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Please typ yout user name and pastwosd 105313188 AT 9724TS Uses Name E OS Pad Save this password in your password list CS ze Figure 7 20 Enter Network Password window Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 142 7 4 Secure Socket Layer SSL Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication digital signatures and encryption These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels l Key Exchange The first part of the ciphersuite string specifies the public key algori
350. uthorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the SSH User Authentication window There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user which are Host Based Password and Public Key 3 Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH client and the SSH server using the SSH Algorithm window 4 Finally enable SSH on the Switch using the SSH Configuration window After completing the preceding steps a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a secure in band connection SSH Configuration The following window is used to configure and view settings for the SSH server and can be opened by clicking Security Management gt Secure Shell SSH SSH Configuration SSH Server Status Max Session Connection TimeOut Auth Fail Session Rekeymg New SSH Configuration Settings SSH Server Status Max Session 1 3 Connection TimeOwut 120 600 Auth Fail 2 20 Session Rekeying Figure 7 23 Current and New SSH Configuration Settings To configure the SSH server on the Switch modify the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description SSH Server Status Use the pull down menu to enable or disable SSH on the Switch The default is Disabled Max Session 1 3 Enter a value between and 3 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch T
351. value can be set from 50 Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Mask Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1 default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user Replace priority with Click the corresponding box if you want to re write the 802 1 default priority of a packet to the value entered in the Priority field which meets the criteria specified previously in this command before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1 user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1 see the QoS section of this manual Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Enter a MAC Address for the source MAC address Enter a MAC Address mask for the destination MAC address Enter a value from 0 7 to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 80
352. warding Yes Yes Table 6 2 Comparing Port States RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state it no longer relies on timer configurations RSTP compliant bridges are sensitive to feedback from other RSTP compliant bridge links Ports do not need to wait for the topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state In order to allow this rapid transition the protocol introduces two new variables the edge port and the point to point P2P port Edge Port The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop cannot be created An example would be a port connected directly to a single workstation Ports that are designated as edge ports transition to a forwarding state immediately without going through the listening and learning states An edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port P2P Port A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges Under RSTP MSTP all ports operating in full duplex mode are considered to be P2P ports unless manually overridden through configuration 802 14 802 Iw 802 15 Compatibility MSTP or RSTP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to 802 14 format when necessary However any segment using 802 14 STP will not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid
353. word If a password was previously configured for this entry enter it here in order to change it to a new password New Local Enable Password Enter the new password that you wish to set on the Switch to authenticate users attempting to access Administrator Level privileges the Switch The user may set a password of up to 15 characters Confirm Local Enable Password Confirm the new password entered above Entering a different password here from the one set in the New Local Enabled field will result in a fail message Enable Admin The Enable Admin window is for users who have logged on to the Switch on the normal user level and wish to be promoted to the administrator level After logging on to the Switch users will have only user level privileges To gain access to administrator level privileges the user will open this window and will have to enter an authentication password Possible authentication methods for this function include TACACS KTACACS TACACS RADIUS user defined server groups local enable local account on the Switch or no authentication none Because XTACACS and TACACS do not support the enable function the user must create a special account on the server host which has the username enable and a password configured by the administrator that will support the enable function This function becomes inoperable when the authentication policy is disabled To view the following window click Security Management gt Access A
354. x A for the translated safety statement in your language Wichtig Anhang B enthalt bersetzte Sicherheitshinweise f r die Installation dieses Gerats Wenn Sie sehen schlagen Sie in Anhang A den bersetzten Sicherheitshinweis in Ihrer Sprache nach Vigtigt Till g B indeholder oversatte sikkerhedsadvarsler der vedr rer installation af dette udstyr Nar De ser symbolet skal De sla op i till g A og finde de oversatte sikkerhedsadvarsler i Deres eget sprog Belangrijk Appendix B bevat vertaalde veiligheidsopmerkingen voor het installeren van deze apparatuur Wanneer de ziet raadpleeg Appendix A voor vertaalde v eiligheidsinstructies in uw taal Important L annexe B contient les instructions de s curit relatives l installation de cet quipement Lorsque vous voyez le symbole reportez vous l annexe A pour consulter la traduction de ces instructions dans votre langue T rke Liite sis lt t m n laitteen asentamiseen liittyv t k nnetyt turvaohjeet Kun n et symbolin katso k nnetty turvaohjetta liitteest A Importante l Appendice B contiene avvisi di sicurezza tradotti per l installazione di questa apparecchiatura II simbolo indica di consultare l Appendice A per l avviso di sicurezza nella propria lingua Viktig Tillegg B inneholder oversatt sikkerhetsinformasjon for installering av dette utstyret du ser pner du til Tillegg A for finne den oversatte sikkerhetsinformasjonen nsket
355. xxx xxx that uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the OSPF domain DHCP BOOTP Relay The BOOTP hops count limit allows the maximum number of hops routers that the BOOTP messages can be relayed through to be set If a packet s hop count is more than the hop count limit the packet is dropped The range is between and 16 hops with a default value of 4 The relay time threshold sets the minimum time in seconds that the Switch will wait before forwarding a BOOT REQUEST packet If the value in the seconds field of the packet is less than the relay time threshold the packet will be dropped The range is between 0 and 65 536 seconds with a default value of 0 seconds DHCP BOOTP Relay Information To enable and configure BOOTP or DHCP on the Switch click Configuration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP BOOTP Global Settings Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch ER DHCPIBootp Global Settings Bootp Relay Status Disabled Bootp Hops Count Limit 1 16 D Bootp Relay Time Threshold 0 65535 Figure 6 122 DHCP BootP Global Settings window Apply The following fields can be set Parameter Description BOOTP Relay Status This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the BOOTP DHCP Relay service on the Switch The default is Disabled BOOTP HOPS Count Limit 1 16 This field allows an entry between 6 to
356. y from the SNMP Community Table click the X under the Delete heading corresponding to the entry you wish to delete SNMP Host Table Use the SNMP Host Table to set up SNMP trap recipients Open the SNMP Manager folder and click on the SNMP Host Table link This will open the SNMP Host Table page as shown below To delete an existing SNMP Host Table entry click the corresponding X under the Delete heading To display the current settings for an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the blue link for the entry under the Host IP Address heading Total Entries 0 Note Maximum of 10 entries SNMP Host Table Host IP Address Community Name SNMP 3 SNMP Version us User Name Delete Figure 8 9 SNMP Host Table To add a new entry to the Switch s SNMP Host Table click the Add button in the upper left hand corner of the page This will open the SNMP Host Table Configuration page as shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 154 SNMP Host Table Configuration Host IP Address SNMP Version Community String SNMPv3 User Name Show All SNMP Host Table Entries Figure 8 10 SNMP Host Table Configuration window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Host IP Address Type the IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch SNMP Version VI To specifies that SNMP version will be used V2 To sp
357. y in use Displays the current stacking state of the Switch which may be MASTER or SLAVE Displays the number of switches in the switch stack Device Status The Device Status window can be found in the Monitoring menu by clicking the Device Status link This window shows the status of the physical attributes of the Switch including power sources and fans Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Device Status ID Internal Power External Power Side Fan Back Fan Figure 9 16 Device Status window The following fields may be viewed in this window Parameter Description ID The Box ID of the Switch in the switch stack Internal Power A read only field denoting the current status of the internal power supply Active will suggest the mechanism is functioning correctly while Fail will show the mechanism is not functioning correctly External Power A read only field denoting the current status of the external power supply Active will suggest the mechanism is functioning correctly while Fail will show the mechanism is not functioning correctly Side Fan A read only field denoting if the side fan of the Switch is functioning properly Back Fan A read only field denoting if the back fan of the Switch is functioning properly 9 6 MAC Address This allows the Switch s dynamic MAC address forwarding table to be viewed When the Switch learns an association between a MAC address and a port
358. y the user of up to 15 characters Method I 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four 4 of the following authentication methods to this method list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server server_group Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch Enable Method Lists The Enable Method Lists window is used to set up Method Lists to promote users with user level privileges to Administrator Admin level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined
359. yer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch Chapter Introduction 1 1 Ethernet Technology 1 2 Switch Description 1 3 Features 1 4 Ports 1 5 Front Panel Components 1 6 Rear Panel Description 1 7 Side Panel Description 1 8 Gigabit Combo Ports 1 9 Ethernet Technology 1 10 Fast Ethernet Technology l I Ethernet Technology Fast Ethernet The growing importance of LANs and the increasing complexity of desktop computing applications are fueling the need for high performance networks A number of high speed LAN technologies are proposed to provide greater bandwidth and improve client server response times Among them Fast Ethernet or 1007 provides a non disruptive smooth evolution from 10 technology 100Mbps Fast Ethernet is a standard specified by the IEEE 802 3 LAN committee It is an extension of the IOMbps Ethernet standard with the ability to transmit and receive data at 100Mbps while maintaining the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD Ethernet protocol Gigabit Ethernet Technology Gigabit Ethernet is an extension of IEEE 802 3 Ethernet utilizing the same packet structure format and support for CSMA CD protocol full duplex flow control and management objects but with a tenfold increase in theoretical throughput over 100Mbps Fast Ethernet and one hundred fold increase over OMbps Ethernet Since it is compatible with all 10Mbps and 100Mbps Ethernet environments Gigabit Ethernet provides a str
360. ype of authentication to be used for the packet Authentication A 64 bit field used by the authentication scheme Hello Packet Hello packets are OSPF packet type are sent periodically on all interfaces including virtual links in order to establish and maintain neighbor relationships In addition Hello Packets are multicast on those physical networks having a multicast or broadcast capability enabling dynamic discovery of neighboring routers All routers connected to a common network must agree on certain parameters such as the Network Mask the Hello Interval and the Router Dead Interval These parameters are included in hello packets so that differences can inhibit the forming of neighbor relationships A detailed explanation of the receive processing for Hello packets so that differences can inhibit the forming of neighbor relationships The format of the Hello packet is shown below Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 108 OSPF Hello Packet Octets 3 EN Version Packet Length Router ID Area ID Checksum Authentication Type Authentication Authentication Network Mask Hello Interval Router Priority Router Dead Interval Designated Router Backup Designated Router Neighbour Figure 6 101 Hello Packet Field Description Network Mask The network mask associated with this interface Options The optional capabilities supporte
361. z The rear panel also includes an outlet for an optional external power supply When power fails the optional external RPS will take over all the power immediately and automatically 1 7 Side Panel Components The right hand side panel of the Switch contains 2 system fans while the left hand panel includes a heat vent The system fans are used to dissipate heat The sides of the system also provide heat vents to serve the same purpose Do not block these openings and leave at least 6 inches of space at the rear and sides of the Switch for proper ventilation Be reminded that without proper heat dissipation and air circulation system components might overheat which could lead to system failure Figure 5 Side Panels Allied Telesyn AT 9724TS High Density Layer 3 Stackable Gigabit Ethernet Switch 13 Chapter 2 Installation 2 Package Contents 2 2 Before You Connect to the Network 2 3 Installing the Switch Without the Rack 2 4 Rack Installation 2 5 Power On 2 6 Power Failure 2 7 Redundant Power System 2 1 Package Contents Open the shipping carton of the Switch and carefully unpack its contents The carton should contain the following items One AT 9724TS Switch One AC power cord One Stacking Cable One CD which includes the AT 9724TS Manual and Net Cover documents One Warranty Card Mounting kit two brackets and screws Four rubber feet with adhesive backing RS 232 console cable If any item is found mi

Allied Telesis AT-9724TS User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents